JP2022075864A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily improving desire to operate operation means.

SOLUTION: Depending on difference in game modes related to a big win game, an MPU 221 performs a plurality of kinds of presentations. Therefore, for example, compared to other operations, an operation to a frame button 22 by obeying the instruction of an audio output device 226 raises a profit to be given to a player by a third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the player's willingness for participation to the operation of the frame button 22.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-150122

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the operation motivation for the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily improving the motivation to operate an operating means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a display means for displaying the lottery result. In the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the display of the identification information indicating that the display means is the predetermined lottery result, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the game ball is In a gaming machine provided with a variable winning means that can be changed from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a ball to an open state in which it is easy to enter a ball, an operating means that can be operated by a player and an operating mode of the operating means are instructed in a plurality of modes. Compared to the instruction means to be used and the profit given to the player when the operation means is not operated according to the instruction of the instruction means, the player when the operation means is operated according to the instruction of the instruction means. It is provided with a profit-giving means for increasing the profit given to the slingshot.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is given to the player by the profit-giving means based on the operation of the operating means by the player according to the operation as instructed by the instruction means in the gaming machine according to claim 1. The profits to be made are maintained on the maximum side.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, when the operating means is not operated in accordance with the instructions of the instructing means, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the profit-giving means. Is set so that the profit given to the player can be maintained.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the motivation for operating the operating means can be satisfactorily improved.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to further improve the operation motivation for the operating means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the stress given to the player can be alleviated.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front view of the internal flow path of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is a partial front view of the internal flow path of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is a partial front view of the internal flow path of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a rear case. It is a front perspective view of the ball production device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sphere effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sphere effect device. It is a rear perspective view of a ball effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a sphere effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a sphere effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating disk. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating disk. (A) is a front view of the rotating disk, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating disk in the XVIIb-XVIIb line of FIG. 17 (a), and (c) is a rear view of the rotating disk. Is. It is a schematic front view of the rotating disk which extracted only the outer shape of the rotating disk. (A) is a top view of the ball staging device, (b) is a partial front view of the ball staging device, and (c) is a portion of the ball staging device in the XIXc-XIXc line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a sectional view. It is a front view of the ball effect device in the 1st receiving state. It is sectional drawing of the sphere effect device in the XXI-XXI line of FIG. It is a front view of the ball effect device in the 2nd receiving state. It is sectional drawing of the sphere staging apparatus in line XXIII-XXIII of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of a rolling flow path portion, a second cylindrical portion, and a first through hole in the XXIII-XXIII line of FIG. 22. It is a front view of the ball effect device in the example of the receiving prevention state. It is a front view of the ball effect device in the example of the receiving prevention state. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd cylindrical part. (A) to (c) are front views of the second cylindrical portion showing the posture change of the second tubular portion. It is a figure which showed the example of the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd specific winning opening in the 1st operation pattern, and the example of the time change of the rotating disk of the ball effect device in 1st production example. It is a figure which showed the example of the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd specific winning opening in the 1st operation pattern, and the example of the time change of the rotating disk of the ball effect device in 1st production example. It is a figure which showed an example of the timekeeping change of the rotating disk of the ball effect device in the 1st specific winning opening, the 2nd specific winning opening and the 2nd effect example in the 2nd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed an example of the timekeeping change of the rotating disk of the ball effect device in the 1st specific winning opening, the 2nd specific winning opening and the 2nd effect example in the 3rd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed an example of the time change of a storage plate and the time change of a ball effect device with respect to a jackpot game. It is a figure which showed an example of the time change of a storage plate and the time change of a ball effect device with respect to a jackpot game.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations above and below the left side (arrow L side) of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is attached. The inner frame 12 is supported as an opening / closing axis so as to be openable / closable toward the front side (arrow F side).

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails (not shown), winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front surface is provided. In order to support the front frame 14, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side (arrow L side) of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. 14 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side (arrow F side) of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. Further, the lower plate 15 is formed so as to project toward the front side below the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed by inclining downward to the right side (arrow R side), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 passes through the launch supply port 17k (see FIG. 12) due to the inclination, and the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12). (See Fig. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface (side surface of the arrow U) of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. In addition, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in the upper left portion (arrow L, U side portion) of the front view of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), and an indicator lamp capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is displayed. 34 is provided.

Further, on the lower side (arrow D side) of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side (arrow R side), a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate stamp or the like attached to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front of the board 13 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c (in the direction of arrow D). The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

The lower plate 15 located on the lower side (arrow D side) of the upper plate 17 is a ball receiving portion for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17, and is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. Has been done. On the right side (arrow R side) of the lower plate 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 15 when the ball stored in the lower plate 15 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 15. Each time the ball pulling lever 52 is pushed in, the bottom surface opening 15a formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 is switched between an open state and a closed state. When the bottom opening 15a is opened, the ball naturally falls from the bottom opening 15a and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 15 (generally referred to as a "Senryobako"; hereinafter the same) is placed below the lower plate 15. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 15 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 15.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral edge is on the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). It is attached. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. In FIG. 2, the structure arranged on the back surface side of the base plate 60 is not shown. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13 (the portion on the U side of the arrow). A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2, upper portion on the arrow L side), and the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. The situation that it ends up is prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part of FIG. 2, upper part on the R side of the arrow) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum or more is returned. When it hits the rubber 69, it is repelled toward the center while the momentum is attenuated. Further, an arc connecting the rails is provided on the inner surface side between the tip of the inner rail 61 on the lower right side (lower on the arrow R side) and the tip on the upper right side of the outer rail 62 (upper on the arrow R side). The resin arc member 70 formed in the above is driven into the base plate 60 and fixed.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally opens the entrance 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is also determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined to be a big hit of the special symbol with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probabilistic state of the special symbol), 60 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entry into the first entrance 64 is referred to as "the lottery of the special symbol 1", and the lottery is performed for the entry into the second entry 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the special symbol becomes a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is set for a predetermined time (specified time (for example, 30 seconds)). The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds) until a lapse of time or until 10 balls are won. As a result, a large amount of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual.

There are six types of special symbols, "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit a", "big hit b", and "big hit c". The opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are configured differently depending on the jackpot type.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. It is also displayed and is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

In the present embodiment, after the jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a), the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a special symbol from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. It is configured to shift to the state (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c), the normal symbol time is shortened until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

It should be noted that the added value after the jackpot game is not limited to those described above. For example, as an added value after the end of the big hit, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times, and the lottery of the special symbol ends 100 times. After that, it may be configured to be set to the normal state.

The number of lottery of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times. Further, the number of times of lottery for the special symbol in which the above-mentioned normal symbol is shortened is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the subsequent big hit increases as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high-probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

Further, the "normal symbol time saving state" (during the time saving) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. Further, the "normal state" means a state of the game in which neither the probability change of the special symbol nor the time reduction of the normal symbol is increased (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is reached. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased from the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

A plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided on the upper right side of the front view (the part on the arrow R and U sides in FIG. 2) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entrance 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is reserved up to 4 times for each type of entry slot, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of a normal pattern). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot a, jackpot b, and jackpot c) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 to display the third symbol. The second symbol is variablely displayed triggered by the passage of a ball of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display and a ball of a normal entry port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is displayed. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", "big hit c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", it is one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols with the addition of are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

Next, a display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily released when the special symbol is probablely changed or the normal symbol is shortened, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, although the details will be described later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a big hit (big hit a) where the maximum profit can be obtained, as compared with the case where a big hit is made by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball. Therefore, in the probable change state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit or the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right-handed strike. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probable change state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right, which is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probable change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the player can perform the probabilistic change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. This prevents situations in which the benefits of becoming a vehicle are not fully received.

In the right-handed navigation, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the character is turned to the right (pointing in the direction of arrow R) above and below (arrow U side and arrow D side). The arrows are displayed three by three. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, the player can benefit from the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be performing a right-handed strike even though the player is not in a period in which the ball should be launched (right-handed) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed to the third symbol display device 81 in this case. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state (a state in which neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol is performed).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640). For this reason, if a right-handed strike is performed in a normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the ball is launched aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed strike. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to make a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

When it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the characters "warning" and "play left-handed!" To the third symbol display device 81. Characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not hit right (should hit left). Further, the clerk in the hall can also easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of performing right-handed in a normal state by confirming the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen.

As a method of determining whether or not a player is hitting right, for example, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) where the ball can flow in when hitting right. Judgment is made based on whether or not the ball has been hit.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), an illegal game is performed. It may be configured to display a right-handed warning image by determining that the image is present. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), fraud is performed against the hall computer. It may be configured to output a signal indicating that the signal is being output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraudulent activity is being performed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 will be described. Here, when an abnormality occurs in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650, for example, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). An example is the case where a ball entering the mouth 650a is detected.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the text "Call the gate error staff" is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is unsuccessful, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol of “◯” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game. As a result, during the probable change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is in the open state. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the right side of the game board (arrow R side). ) Is configured to be able to pass through a part of the ball flowing down. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is out of order. If there is, the symbol of "x" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (arrow R direction), and is, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (arrow L direction). ) Is fine. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80 (in the direction of arrow D), a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entrance 64, the first entry switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged below the front view (direction of arrow D) of the first ball entry port 64. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the second entrance switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right out openings 661 are arranged at positions shifted to the left and right from the lowermost end of the game area, and a second winning opening 640 is provided at a position between them (near the lowermost end of the game area). Arranged. That is, the second winning opening 640 provided with the electric accessory 640a that opens and closes on both the left and right sides is arranged in a positional relationship sandwiched between the out openings 661 from the left and right.

Further, the first entry slot 64 and the second entry slot 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize, respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry port 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state, standing on the arrow L side, see FIG. 2), and the ball is a second entry port. It is difficult to win a prize in 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the electric combination The object 640a is in an open state (enlarged state, tilted toward the arrow R side (tilted from the vicinity of the lower end)), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. It becomes easier to display the symbol of "○" on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the prize in the second entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state depending on whether the ball wins in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. be. However, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit A, big hit a) where the maximum profit (outgoing ball) is obtained as the type of big hit selected in the case of a big hit is when the ball wins in the second entrance 640. Is set higher than when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Toward, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first ball entrance 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640, a ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"). ), It is advantageous for the player to aim to win a big hit by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second entrance 640. Will be.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the player can be entertained.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and a first specific winning opening (large opening) is arranged as a long opening in the left-right direction in a substantially central portion thereof. Mouth) 65a is provided. A second variable winning device 650 is arranged between the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second variable winning device 65. The details of the second variable winning device 650 will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery caused by winning a prize in the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, wins a prize until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, or 10 balls are won. Until) will be released.

The first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a can be repeated with a predetermined number of times (15 times (15 rounds) in the present embodiment) as the maximum number of times in total. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual (in the present embodiment). (15) prize balls will be paid out based on the prize of one ball.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 operates an opening / closing plate that forms an open state for guiding the ball to the first specific winning opening 65a by retracting to the inside of the game board 13, and a large opening / closing plate thereof. It is equipped with an open port solenoid. Normally, the opening / closing plate is in a closed state in which the ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first specific winning opening 65a. In the case of a big hit, the opening / closing plate is retracted by driving the large opening solenoid, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which it is easy to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state are alternated. The solenoid operates to repeat.

In the present embodiment, when the player strikes right, if the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, there is a high probability that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a will be opened. On the other hand, since the general winning opening 63 is arranged on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 65, a part of the launched ball will win the general winning opening 63. , The opening and closing operation time (opening time) of the first specific winning opening 65a is likely to be different each time. That is, when the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, if 10 balls are hit with a right-handed hit, or if the balls do not win in the general winning opening 63, the 10 balls are the first specific winning opening 65a. Since there is a possibility of winning a prize, the first specific winning opening 65a shifts to the closed state with the winning of 10 balls (a specified number of balls). On the other hand, when a ball wins in the general winning opening 63, the number of balls heading to the first specific winning opening 65a is less than 10, so all the remaining balls win in the first specific winning opening 65a. However, the first specific winning opening 65a is maintained in the open state. Therefore, since it is necessary to launch an additional ball, there will be a difference in the opening / closing operation time (opening time) of the first specific winning opening 65a.

As a result, among the balls fired by right-handed hitting, most of the balls flowing downward on the right side of the second variable winning device 650 are guided to the first variable winning device 65, even if the board configuration is such that the interval is long. The time required for the jackpot game when stopping (adjusting the launch mode so that the ball guided by the variable winning devices 65, 650 does not occur when the variable winning devices 65, 650 are closed) is the interval. It is possible to make it easier to extend the time required for the jackpot game when the pause is not performed (when left unattended).

Here, the player who has a higher experience value of the game may frequently stop the interval for the purpose of improving the ball holding. On the other hand, if there is a large difference in the profit obtained by the jackpot game of the same jackpot symbol between the beginner and the beginner depending on whether or not the interval is stopped, the fairness of the game is lacking.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game is played on the premise that the interval is stopped, it is uncertain how many balls will enter the general winning opening 63 upstream of the game before being guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to make it uncertain how many balls should be fired before the fire should be stopped. For example, if 10 balls (specified number of balls) are fired in order to reduce wasted balls, and the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 63 is to be fired again later, a new ball is fired by that amount (at intervals). Since the time required for the round game R is extended by the time until the ball is guided to the first variable winning device 65), the time required for the jackpot game R for stopping the interval can be extended.

On the other hand, since this extension of time is not caused by making it difficult for the ball to be guided by the first variable winning device 65, the game board 13 does not pass through the general winning opening 63 when playing a big hit game by leaving it unattended. The ball flowing down the front side of the ball is quickly guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time required for the jackpot game R from being extended when the jackpot game is performed by leaving it untouched.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by intentionally extending the time required for the jackpot game R when the game in which the interval pause is performed is performed, the damage (waste) suffered by the player when the interval pause is not performed. It can be balanced with the generation of spheres). If the interval stop is not performed, the time for receiving the lottery can be secured as much as the jackpot game ends quickly, so that it is easy to shorten the period until the next jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of balls from being greatly changed due to the difference in the experience value of the game.

At the right corner (arrow R side corner) on the lower side (arrow D side) of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided, and the sticking space K1 is stuck. The stamps and the like can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64 (in the direction of the arrow D side). A ball that flows down the game area and does not win a prize in any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Run.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the shaft and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, etc.) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuates effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, another device 228 (for example, a drive motor KM1), a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as the variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

It will be described back to FIG. The second variable winning device 650 is arranged in a region where the ball flows down below the through gate 67, and is in an open state of tilting to the right with the lower end as an axis so that the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 650a. And the open / close plate drive solenoid (commercially available solenoid, solenoid 209) that can change the state in a closed state that prevents the ball that rises to the left around the same axis and is guided to the second specified winning opening 650a (included in the commercially available solenoid, solenoid 209). A solenoid plate 651 driven by)) and an introduction flow path DR that is arranged facing the solenoid plate 651 and extends to the second specific winning opening 650a and guides the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a. An intermediate flow from the upstream end of the ball receiving wall portion 652 forming the wall portion on one side (left side) and the lower side wall portion forming the intermediate flow path TR through which the ball passing through the second specified winning opening 650a flows down. It is provided with an upstream lower wall portion 653 extending to the left to the branch point of the road TR. The upstream lower wall portion 653 is configured as an inclined wall portion having an inclination with respect to the horizontal direction (in the present embodiment, the inclination angle is about 5 degrees).

Further, the second variable winning device 650 has a communication opening 654 that opens in the front-rear direction so that a ball flowing down the intermediate flow path TR can pass along the extension direction of the upstream lower wall portion 653, and an intermediate flow path TR. To the upstream lower wall portion 653 at the position between the discharge opening 655, which is opened in the front-rear direction so that the ball flowing downward from the branch point of the above can pass, and the discharge opening 655 and the upstream side lower wall portion 653 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a storage convex portion 656 that is projected from the left side in an approaching manner.

Further, the second variable winning device 650 is extended in a plate shape from the root side of the storage convex portion 656 to the lower left, and the ball P1 (in each round game R described later, the opening / closing plate 651 is opened at the beginning. A support that supports the vertical movement of the storage plate 657 while forming an opening in the vertical direction in the ball receiving bottom portion 656a in which the ball passing through the second specific winning opening 650a) is configured to be rollable. With an opening 656b.

Further, the second variable winning device 650 is in a permissible state and an intermediate flow path TR that retracts downward from the intermediate flow path TR and allows the passage of a ball at a position between the storage convex portion 656 and the communication opening 654 in the left-right direction. It is driven by a storage plate drive solenoid (commercially available solenoid and other devices included in device 228 (see FIG. 4)) so that the state can be changed in a regulated state that overhangs inward (upward from the allowable state) and restricts the passage of the ball. A storage plate 657 and a ball receiving upper wall portion 658 that is vertically opposed to the storage convex portion 656 and is inclined downward as it approaches the storage plate 657 in the upper wall portion of the intermediate flow path TR. Be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a partial front view of the internal flow path of the second variable winning device 650. The lower end of the ball receiving wall portion 652 is arranged at a position where the distance W1 from the opening / closing plate 651 in the closed state is at least twice the diameter of the ball. As a result, another ball passes through the second specific winning opening 650a while the ball remains in the introduction flow path DR, and another ball is additionally introduced while the opening / closing plate 651 operates to the closed state. Even when the ball enters the road DR, the width of the introduction flow path DR is sufficiently secured, so that the ball protrudes from the introduction flow path DR and collides with the opening / closing plate 651, or the ball is weighted on the opening / closing plate 651. Since it is possible to avoid the continuous application, it is possible to prevent the ball from hindering the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 651.

The internal flow path of the second variable winning device 650 has a front-rear width slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere in the downstream of the second specific winning opening 650a, and the flow path and the storage plate whose upstream side lower wall portion 653 constitutes one side. The vertical width of the flow path on the downstream side of 657 is configured to have a width dimension of about 1.1 times the diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down smoothly and the later ball from overtaking the earlier ball. The area on the left side of the lower wall portion 653 on the upstream side and on the right side of the storage plate 657 has a longer vertical width as compared with other areas. This makes it easier for the ball radiated to the left of the lower wall portion 653 on the upstream side to flow down in a parabolic trajectory.

The communication opening 654 is arranged on the front side of the rolling flow path portion 870, which will be described later, and is an opening that guides the passing ball to the rolling path forming portion 874 of the rolling flow path portion 870.

A part of the balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 650a abuts on the storage plate 657. The internal shape of the second variable winning device 650 is designed so that the period from passing through the opening / closing plate 651 to reaching the storage plate 657 does not exceed 1 second. The reason why the period from passing through the opening / closing plate 651 until the ball reaches the storage plate 657 is set to 1 second depends on the relationship with the timing of the state change of the storage plate 657, but will be described in detail later. ..

The ball receiving upper wall portion 658 is arranged so as to face the upstream lower wall portion 653 in the flow direction of the rolling ball, and is extended downward from the receiving portion 658a for receiving the rolling ball and the lower end of the receiving portion 658a. It is provided with a flow angle adjusting unit 658b for adjusting the flow angle of a ball in the middle of flow.

The receiving portion 658a is inclined downward along a straight line KB1 having a gradient larger than the gradient of the downward inclination of the upstream lower wall portion 653 (in the present embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction is about 30 degrees), and the flow angle adjusting portion is provided. 658b inclines downward along a straight line KB2 having a gradient larger than that of the straight line KB1 (in the present embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction is about 40 degrees). As a result, the direction of the velocity of the ball flowing down while contacting the ball receiving upper wall portion 658 can be gradually changed from the left direction to the downward direction, and the ball bounces to the right when it collides with the storage plate 657. Can be prevented.

With reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the shape of the storage convex portion 656 and the flow mode of the sphere will be described. 6 and 7 are partial front views of the internal flow path of the second variable winning device 650. In FIG. 6, the ball P1 guided by the intermediate flow path TR and rolling on the upstream lower wall portion 653 abuts on the storage plate 657 in the regulated state and is restricted from flowing down. After the state of 6, the state in which the sphere P2 flowing down the intermediate flow path TR collides with the sphere P1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 6, the storage convex portion 656 is convexly provided at a radius equal to or more than the radius ra of the sphere below the left lower end portion of the upstream lower wall portion 653 with a gradient similar to that of the straight line KB2, and the upstream lower wall portion 653. The separation width H1 between the left lower end portion and the storage convex portion 656 is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere (twice the radius ra) (in the present embodiment, the length is 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). Set in). When the sphere P1 protrudes to the right of the storage convex portion 656, the length of the separation width H1 is based on the distance between the sphere P1 whose flow is restricted by the storage plate 657 and the upstream lower wall portion 653. It may be defined as. In this case, the sphere P2 is set to be slightly longer than the sum of the dimension in which the sphere P1 protrudes from the storage convex portion 656 along the straight line defining the separation width H1 and the diameter of the sphere. It is possible to secure a sufficient separation width H1 for passing.

In addition, the storage convex portion 656 is convexly provided in a manner (upper surface shape and positional relationship) in which the upper surface is along the outer circumference of the first sphere whose flow is restricted and stayed on the storage plate 657. Therefore, since the sphere P1 is supported by the storage convex portion 656 from the lower right when colliding with the storage plate 657, when the sphere P1 reaches the storage plate 657, or when the sphere P2 and the sphere P1 come later, It is possible to prevent the ball P1 from bouncing to the right due to the load applied to the right from the storage plate 657 when the ball collides with the other. That is, the sphere P1 can be easily maintained at the position shown in FIG.

When the convex length of the storage convex portion 656 is set within a range that does not exceed the right end portion of the ball P1 whose flow is restricted to the storage plate 657, it collides with the ball P1 as shown in FIG. Since the ball P2 flowing down between the upstream lower wall portion 653 and the storage convex portion 656 can be prevented from colliding with the storage convex portion 656, the ball P2 can be smoothly discharged.

In the ball receiving wall portion 658, the minimum separation width MIH2, which is the minimum value of the separation width of the ball P1 which is restricted from flowing down by the storage plate 657 and is stopped with the right hemisphere, is set to be smaller than the diameter of the ball P2. As a result, it is dimensionally restricted that the sphere P2 passes between the sphere receiving wall portion 658 and the sphere P1 and passes to the left of the center of the sphere P1.

According to the present embodiment, according to the above-described configuration, the ball P1 flowing down the intermediate flow path TR rolls on the upstream lower wall portion 653 along the arrow X1, collides with the ball receiving upper wall portion 658, and flows down. After being adjusted, it collides with the storage plate 657 and stops (see FIG. 6).

In the present embodiment, since the tip of the storage convex portion 656 (one end of the separation width H1) is arranged below the arrow X1 (the arrow along the flow locus of the sphere P1), the sphere P1 is the storage convex portion 656. The possibility of collision with the tip can be reduced, and the ball P1 flowing down along the arrow X1 can be prevented from falling between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a. In addition, the direction of the arrow X1 (downward left) and the opening direction of the passage between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a (the direction orthogonal to the arrow shown as the separation width H1 and the downward right direction) are left and right. Since it is configured in the opposite direction, it is possible to prevent the sphere P1 from falling between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a unless the sphere P1 is bounced to the right.

Here, in the present embodiment, the ball P1 separated from the upstream lower wall portion 653 along the arrow X1 collides with the receiving portion 658a of the ball receiving upper wall portion 658, and the gradient of the receiving portion 658a is in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, it is set to about 30 degrees, and the gradient of the upstream side wall portion 653 is set to about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction, so that the incident angle of the sphere P1 with respect to the receiving portion 658a is 65 degrees. If the sphere P1 bounces at a reflection angle of 65 degrees after the collision, the sphere P1 will have a velocity component to the left even after being bounced, and will not be bounced to the right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sphere P1 from falling between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the support opening 656b includes a protrusion projecting toward the storage plate 657 at one point in the vertical direction, and the protrusion 657 supports the storage plate 657. Further, the storage plate 657 is supported by a storage plate drive solenoid (commercially available solenoid and other devices included in the device 228 (see FIG. 4)) with a slight rattling in the left-right direction at the lower end portion. .. Therefore, the storage plate 657 is configured to be easily rattled by a load in the left-right direction.

Due to this rattling, the load generated when the sphere P1 collides with the storage plate 657 or when the sphere P1 collides with the sphere P1 (see FIG. 7) and the sphere P1 presses the storage plate 657 is absorbed. Can be done. As a result, the impact given to the storage plate 657 can be alleviated, the durability of the storage plate 657 can be improved, and the distance at which the sphere P1 rebounds after colliding with the storage plate 657 can be shortened. It is possible to prevent accidentally bouncing over the storage convex portion 656 to the right and flowing down between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a.

On the other hand, the ball P2 flows down the ball receiving wall portion 658 and then flows down along the arrow X2, and is restricted from moving to the left between the right hemisphere of the ball P1 and the ball receiving upper wall portion 658. After that, it flows down along the outer peripheral surface of the sphere P1 and is guided to the discharge opening 655.

The timing at which the storage plate 657 is allowed is defined as a time point after the sphere P2 has passed between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a. For example, as will be described later as a first effect example, the operation timing of the storage plate 657 is such that the ball passing through the opening / closing plate 651 just before the opening / closing plate 651 is closed has the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a. The sum of the time that can be arranged on the upstream side of the interval (30 seconds, which is the maximum time of the operating time T1) and the time, which is less than 1 second, that is the time until the ball passing through the opening / closing plate 651 reaches the storage plate 657. The operating time TSa (35 seconds), which is longer than the operating time (less than 31 seconds), is set when the operating time T1 has elapsed from the start.

Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the sphere P2 from flowing down to the lower left side of the storage convex portion 656, the sphere that passes through the storage plate 657 and flows down when the storage plate 657 becomes an allowable state is limited to the sphere P1. can do.

In the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 655a, which is arranged to face the storage convex portion 656 as a wall portion for guiding the flowing ball and extends from the left lower end of the upstream lower wall portion 653 to the discharge opening 655, is a ball. It is formed in an arc shape with the vicinity of the center of P1 as the axis. Thereby, the sphere P2 can be guided to the discharge opening 655 by utilizing the force in the arc direction of the sphere P2 flowing down along the outer peripheral surface of the sphere P1.

Also, when the sphere P2 is dropped without being guided by an arc-shaped wall, the velocity direction of the sphere P2 is closer to the vertical direction, and it is easy to accelerate due to gravity, which may cause a large bounce (bounce back). In the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the sphere P2 that has reached the front side of the discharge opening 655 by the curved wall portion 655a is the tangential direction of the circle with the center of the sphere P1 as the axis (direction having a sufficient horizontal component). ) Can be directed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the velocity of the ball flowing down while abutting on the curved wall portion 655a is reversed left and right during the flow, so that the velocity in the left-right direction does not become excessively large.

Therefore, while suppressing the excessive acceleration of the sphere P2 due to gravity, it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of acceleration in the left-right direction, and the sphere P2 can flow down with substantially constant velocity movement (constant velocity rotational movement). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball P2 from bouncing back when it reaches the front of the discharge opening 655, and the ball P2 can be smoothly discharged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the storage plate 657 is in the regulated state, only one ball that first flows down the intermediate flow path TR can be stopped on the right side of the storage plate 657, and the ball P1 By switching the storage plate 657 from the stationary state to the allowable state (by retracting downward from the state shown in FIG. 6), the ball P1 flows down to the left and is supplied to the ball staging device 800 through the communication opening 654. Can be done.

FIG. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the rear case 200. The rear case 200 is a box-shaped unit that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13 and whose front side is open. A ball staging device 800 is arranged at the lower inside of the rear case 200. The ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 and has passed through the communication opening 654 is supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870 of the ball staging device 800. The ball effecting device 800 is a device that is visually recognized by the player through the game board 60 and that produces an effect using a ball.

Next, the ball effect device 800 will be described. 9 is a front perspective view of the ball staging device 800, FIGS. 10 and 11 are exploded front perspective views of the ball staging device 800, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the ball staging device 800, FIG. 13 And FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the ball staging device 800.

The ball effect device 800 is a device that performs an effect using a ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 650a, and is attached to a base member 810 that is fastened and fixed to the lower part of the back case 200 and a back side of the base member 810. A flow path constituent plate 820 that is fastened and fixed and forms a flow path of a sphere between the base member 810 and the flow path constituent plate 820 are arranged on the back surface side of the flow path constituent plate 820 and transmit the driving force of the drive motor KM1. The front side of the rotary disk 840, which rotates by the driving force transmitted by the transmission mechanism section 830 and the transmission mechanism section 830, and which can accommodate a sphere inside, and the lower half of the rotary disk 840. Inside the ball that has passed through the front cover 850 that is covered from the base member 810 and fastened and fixed to the base member 810, the left and right covers 860 that are fastened and fixed to the front side and the back side at both left and right ends of the base member 810, and the second winning opening 640. Mainly includes a rolling flow path portion 870 that guides a ball that has reached the ball effect device 800 to the rotating disk 840.

The base member 810 is formed in a plate shape, and has a main body plate portion 811 having through holes KH1 and KH2 formed in a size that allows a sphere to pass through and a shaft hole JH that pivotally supports the rotary disk 840, and the main body plate thereof. The outer wall portion 812 extending in a plate shape to the back surface side of the portion 811 and forming a groove surrounding the range including the through holes KH1 and KH2, and the through holes KH1 and KH2 in the range surrounded by the outer wall portion 812. It is formed by a partition wall portion 813 extending in a plate shape to the back side of the main body plate portion 811 as a partition plate for partitioning the space, and a partition wall portion 813 and an outer wall portion 812 near the lower end portion of the partition wall portion 813. A pair of through elongated holes 814 that are formed through the base member 810 in the plate thickness direction in the range extending in the left-right direction of the groove, and are longer than the front-rear dimension of the main body plate portion 811 at positions separated from each other to the left and right of the main body plate portion 811. Driven at the lower left of the main body plate 811 and the separation frame plate 815 which is formed by the front-rear width and is connected near the upper and lower ends of the main body plate 811 to form a space between the main body plate 811 and the main body plate 811 in the front-rear direction. A ball flowing down either of the motor support portion 816 to which the motor KM1 is fastened and fixed and the flow path formed on the left and right of the second partition plate 813b below the through elongated hole 814 is accepted and turned to the right side. It mainly includes a plate-shaped terminal merging plate portion 817 that inclines downward.

In the outer wall portion 812, the upper frame portion 812a near the first through hole KH1 and the lower frame portion 812b below the second through hole KH2 have the same extension length, and the upper frame portion 812a and the lower side An intermediate frame portion 812c connecting the frame portions 812b in the vicinity of the second through hole KH2 is formed with an extension length slightly shorter than the extension length of the upper frame portion 812a and the lower frame portion 812b.

The partition wall portion 813 has a first partition plate 813a that partitions the proximity side of the first through hole KH1 and the second through hole KH2, and a second partition extending along a side extending in the vertical direction of the second through hole KH2. It mainly includes a plate 813b, and a tubular partition cylinder portion 813c that connects the first partition plate 813a and the second partition plate 813b and forms a shaft hole JH.

The extension length of the first partition plate 813a and the second partition plate 813b toward the back side is the same as the extension length of the upper frame portion 812a and the lower frame portion 812b of the outer wall portion 812, and the partition cylinder portion. The axial extension length of the 813c is formed to be slightly longer than the extension length toward the back surface side of the first partition plate 813a and the second partition plate 813b.

The upper surface of the first partition plate 813a is inclined downward toward the side close to the partition cylinder portion 813c, and the end portion on the side close to the partition cylinder portion 813c is connected to the upper end position of the partition cylinder portion 813c. As a result, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first partition plate 813a is allowed to pass above the partition cylinder portion 813c to the right without being dammed at the upper end position of the partition cylinder portion 813c (without being decelerated). Can be done.

The second partition plate 813b is formed on a straight line that passes through the central axis of the partition cylinder portion 813c and faces the vertical direction.

Detection sensors SC1 and SC2 for detecting the passage of a sphere are inserted through the elongated hole 814.

The separation frame plate 815 is a narrow rod-shaped portion extending toward the main body plate portion 811 so as to pass through the space with the main body plate portion 811, and the rod-shaped connecting portion 815a connected to the main body plate portion 811 is provided. Be prepared.

The rod-shaped connecting portion 815a has a perforated disk-shaped support portion 815a1 that supports the fastening portion 861a1 when fastening and fixing the decorative portion 861 of the left and right covers 860, and has a width dimension and a thickness dimension larger than the diameter of the support portion 815a1. Is provided with a short narrow bar portion 815a2.

The drive motor KM1 fastened and fixed to the motor support portion 816 projects a rotation shaft toward the back surface side of the main body plate portion 811, and the drive gear KG1 is fixed to the rotation shaft.

The terminal merging plate portion 817 is shaped to bend vertically downward at a position to the right of the through elongated hole 814. The terminal merging plate portion 817 has a bent shape similar to that of the terminating merging plate portion 817 with a width slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and is arranged opposite to the terminating merging plate portion 817 with the terminating merging plate portion 817. It is provided with a facing plate portion 817a forming a flow path through which a sphere can pass, and protruding ribs 817b protruding from the terminal merging plate portion 817 and the facing plate portion 817a in a rib shape at alternating positions.

In the present embodiment, in any of the production examples described later, the plurality of balls are controlled so as not to pass through the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 in a short time. Therefore, even if the sphere that has passed through the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 is configured to be guided to a single flow path, the spheres do not mesh with each other. Therefore, the flow paths on the downstream side of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 are unified. Since it can be done, the arrangement space of the flow path can be reduced.

Further, since the interval at which the ball reaches the terminal merging plate portion 817 is long, even if the flow speed of the ball is reduced by the protruding rib 817b, the trailing ball does not catch up with the preceding ball. be able to. Therefore, since the flow speed of the ball ejected from the ball staging device 800 can be decelerated, when a sensor for detecting the passage of the ball is arranged at the timing of being ejected from the ball staging device 800, the detection accuracy of the sensor is arranged. Can be secured.

The flow path constituent plate 820 includes a main body plate portion 821 formed of a plate having a size covering a groove formed by the outer wall portion 812, a fitting hole 822 formed in the main body plate portion 821, and a fitting hole 822 thereof. A circle centered on a plurality of support convex portions 823 (three in this embodiment), a fitting hole 822, and a plurality of support convex portions 823, which are projected toward the back surface at intervals below the joint hole 822. A continuous circular outer frame 824 extending to the back surface side of the main body plate portion 821 along the outer shape of a circle having a diameter larger than the outer shape of each gear constituting the transmission mechanism portion 830, and a continuous circular outer frame thereof. A wiring partition plate 825 extending in a plate shape below the outer frame 824 to move the wiring upward, an alignment convex portion 826 projecting in pairs on the front side of the main body plate portion 821, and detection sensors SC1 and SC2. Mainly includes a sensor support portion 827 arranged to face the surface, and an angle detection sensor KSC1 disposed at the upper end position of the continuous circular outer frame 824 to detect the rotation angle of the gear of the transmission mechanism portion 830.

The front side surface of the main body plate portion 821 is in contact with the extended ends of the first partition plate 813a and the second partition plate 813b in a state where the partition cylinder portion 813c and the fitting hole 822 are fitted. As a result, the open side (rear side) of the groove formed by the partition wall portion 813 is set to the main body while aligning the flow path constituent plate 820 with respect to the main body plate portion 8211 in the surface direction (direction orthogonal to the plate thickness direction). By covering with the plate portion 821, it is possible to form a flow path through which the sphere can flow.

In the articulated circular outer frame 824, the formation of a substantially left half portion of the support convex portion 823 at the lowermost end is omitted. As a result, the left half of the transmission gear DG pivotally supported by the support convex portion 823 at the lowermost end is exposed, and the exposed portion is engaged with the drive gear KG1.

The pair of alignment convex portions 826 are extended in a direction in which the contact convex portion 826a having the narrowest spacing and the lower end of the contact convex portion 826a are separated from each other by the thickness dimension of the outer wall portion 812, and the extension thereof. It is provided with a sandwiching convex portion 826b extending downward from the installation end.

The contact convex portion 826a is arranged so as to face the vicinity of the lower end portion of the intermediate frame portion 812c, and the convex tip abuts on the extended tip of the intermediate frame portion 812c.

In the sandwiching convex portion 826b, the lower surface of the extending portion in the left-right direction is arranged to face the upper end surface of the lower frame portion 812b, and the surface of the extending portion in the vertical direction on the second partition plate 813b side is the lower frame portion 812b. It is arranged to face the outer surface of the. In the present embodiment, the shape of the sandwiching convex portion 826b is set so that the facing distance between them is a minute length. Therefore, by fitting the sandwiching convex portion 826 to the lower frame portion 812b, the flow with respect to the base member 810 The alignment of the road constituent plate 820 can be easily performed. As a result, the work of assembling the flow path constituent plate 820 to the base member 810 can be efficiently performed.

The sensor support portion 827 has a shape corresponding to (complementing) the outer shape of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2, and has a misalignment prevention convex portion 827a for preventing the misalignment of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 in the opening radial direction and detection. The shape is arranged above the upper end positions of the sensors SC1 and SC2, and is formed so as to be inclined so that the convex length becomes longer as it goes downward, and the extension line in the inclination direction enters the opening of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2. It mainly includes a ball flow convex portion 827b, which is said to be.

In the present embodiment, the detection sensor SC1 is configured to perform notification that is beneficial to the player by detecting the passage of the ball, and the detection sensor SC2 detects the passage of the ball unlike the detection sensor SC1. It is configured to perform no notification at all, or to perform notification with a lower degree of benefit to the player than when the passage of the ball of the detection sensor SC1 is detected.

The angle detection sensor KSC1 is a well-known optical sensor represented by a photocoupler composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and is a detected gear SG in which light is blocked by a detected portion SGb of the detected gear SG. Determine the posture. In the state where the detected portion SGb is blocked by the angle detection sensor KSC1, the rotating disk 840 constitutes the first receiving state described later.

The transmission mechanism portion 830 is arranged at a position where the plurality of transmission gear DGs rotatably supported by the plurality of support convex portions 823 and the central axis and the rotation axis of the fitting hole 822 coincide with each other, and mesh with the transmission gear DG. The detected gear SG, the plurality of transmission gears DG, and the drive gear KG1 are covered from the back side, and the left fastening hole 831d arranged at the left end is placed on the base member 810 on the right side. The fastening hole 831c is provided with a covering plate 831 to which the fastening hole 831c is fastened and fixed to the flow path constituent plate 820, respectively.

The detected gear SG is a gear member that is non-rotatably connected to the shaft rod portion 843 of the rotating disk 840 by forming the shaft hole in a D-shaped cross section, and is a base member 810 along the rotating shaft. A tubular portion SGa extending in a cylindrical shape on the side and a detected portion SGb extending in a plate shape outward in the radial direction are provided.

The tubular portion SGa is formed with a shaft hole having a D-shaped cross section in the axial direction, and the outer peripheral diameter is slightly shorter than the inner peripheral diameter of the partition tubular portion 813c. Therefore, in a state where the tubular portion SGa is fitted to the partition cylinder portion 813c, the detected gear SG is maintained in a rotatable state and is positioned so that the rotation axis coincides with the central axis of the partition cylinder portion 813c. ..

The detected portion SGb is formed with a length that allows it to pass through the inside of the detection groove of the angle detection sensor KSC1. When the detected unit SGb passes through the inside of the detection groove of the angle detection sensor KSC1, the MPU221 can determine the posture of the detected gear SG.

The plurality of transmission gears DG are rotatably supported by the support convex portion 823, and the flow path constituent plate 820 is fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in the axially supported state to drive the lowermost transmission gear DG. The positional relationship is such that the gear KG1 can be meshed with the gear KG1.

In this case, since the member on which the transmission gear DG is supported and the member on which the drive gear KG1 is supported are different, the misalignment between the members randomly occurring during assembly causes a difference in the meshing relationship, and the transmission mechanism unit 830 It is expected that there will be a problem that it will be difficult to unify the drive resistance that occurs in.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the covering plate 831 is recessed at a position corresponding to the plurality of support convex portions 823 on the front side surface, and the recessed portion 831a is fitted to the support convex portion 823. It is provided with a support hole portion 831b formed at a position corresponding to the cylindrical portion KG1a around the axis of the drive gear KG1 and having a diameter slightly larger than the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion KG1a. As a result, the positional relationship between the support convex portion 823 on which the transmission gear DG is pivotally supported and the cylindrical portion KG1a of the drive gear KG1 can be positioned by a single member, so that the positions of the transmission gear DG and the drive gear KG1 can be positioned. The relationship can be defined within the design error of the lining plate 831.

The covering plate 831 is a through hole through which a screw is inserted when fastened to the flow path constituent plate 820, and is a right fastening hole 831c arranged at the right end portion, and a screw when fastened to the base member 810. It is provided with a left side fastening hole 831d, which is a through hole through which the material is inserted and is arranged at the left side end portion.

Here, in a state where the covering plate 831 is fastened and fixed to the flow path constituent plate 820 via the right fastening hole 831c, the flow path constituent plate is not shielded by the covering plate 831 in the rear view (the range not covered). A screw for fastening the 820 to the base member 810 is arranged. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the order of assembling the flow path constituent plate 820 and the covering plate 831 with respect to the base member 810.

For example, the flow path constituent plate 820 may be fastened and fixed to the base member 810, and then the covering plate 831 may be fastened and fixed. Further, for example, the flow path constituent plate 820 may be fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in a state where the covering plate 831 is fastened and fixed to the flow path constituent plate 820.

For example, the covering plate 831 may be fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in a state where the covering plate 831 is fastened and fixed to the flow path constituent plate 820. In this case, in the temporarily fixed state, the meshing relationship between the drive gear KG1 and the transmission gear DG can be confirmed while driving the drive motor KM1, and the flow path constituent plate 820 is attached to the base member 810. Is in a floating state (not fastened), so if there is a problem with the meshing relationship, only the fastening between the covering plate 831 and the base member 810 is released (only the screw of the left fastening hole 831d is removed). ), The transmission gear DG can be separated from the drive gear KG1 together with the flow path constituent plate 820. As a result, as compared with the case where the base member 810 and the flow path constituent plate 820 are fastened and fixed, the time required for attaching and detaching the screws can be reduced, and the time required for confirming the tooth engagement relationship can be shortened.

The rotating disk 840 has a main body portion 841,842 formed in a disk shape having a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the sphere (twice the diameter ra), and one end thereof is fixed to the center of the rotating main body portion 841,842. A metal rod-shaped shaft rod portion 843 whose end protrudes to the back side and the shaft rod portion 843 are externally fitted with a slight gap, and the outer diameter of the small diameter portion is the inner circumference of the shaft hole JH and the partition cylinder portion 813c. A cylindrical collar member 844 formed slightly shorter than the diameter, a first guide hole 845 drilled in the rotating main body portion 841,842, and a side surface of the shaft rod portion 843 side of the first guide hole 845. A second guide hole 846, which is arranged close to the shaft rod portion 843, is provided.

The shaft rod portion 843 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft hole JH of the base member 810 and the partition cylinder portion 813c in a state of being inserted through the collar member 844, and the outer shape of the other end is inside the shaft hole of the gear to be detected SG. It is formed in the same size as the shape of the side surface. As a result, the detected gear SG can be fitted to the other end of the shaft rod portion 843. In this embodiment, a fitting groove into which a commercially available E-ring can be fitted from the radial direction is formed on the outer periphery of the tip end portion on the other end side of the shaft rod portion 843. As a result, the shaft rod portion 843 can be inserted into the shaft hole JH, and the shaft rod portion 843 can be prevented from coming out of the shaft hole JH in a state where the gear to be detected SG is fitted in the shaft rod portion 843.

Since the collar member 844 has the above-mentioned shape, the misalignment of the collar member 844 with respect to the shaft hole JH and the partition cylinder portion 813c is suppressed, the shaft rod portion 843 can be aligned, and the shaft hole can be aligned. By rotating relative to the JH, the partition cylinder portion 813c, and the shaft rod portion 843, the resistance of the shaft rod portion 843 during rotation can be reduced. As a result, the driving force required for the rotation of the rotating disk 840 can be reduced, so that the degree of heat generation of the driving motor KM1 can be suppressed.

As described above, when the detected gear SG is fitted to the other end of the shaft rod portion 843, the tubular portion SGa is inserted into the partition cylinder portion 813c. That is, in the shaft rod portion 843, the side closer to the main body portion 841,842 is via the collar member 844, and the side far from the main body portion 841,842 (the other end side) is via the tubular portion SGa of the detected gear SG. Each is rotatably supported by the shaft hole JH or the partition cylinder portion 813c. As a result, the rotating disk 840 can be stably rotated while keeping the central axis of the shaft rod portion 843 aligned with the central axis of the shaft hole JH and the partition cylinder portion 813c.

The details of the configuration of the rotary disk 840 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18. FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating disk 840, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating disk 840. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the rotary disk 840 has a front main body portion in which one of the thickness directions is opened by extending a curved wall in the thickness direction so as to surround the circumference of the circular plate. It includes 841 and a back side main body 842 which is a plate-shaped member fastened and fixed from one of the front side main body 841 in the thickness direction and narrows the opening range of the front main body 841.

The front side main body portion 841 includes a disk-shaped plate-shaped portion 841a and a peripheral convex portion 841b that is axially projected along the outer shape of the guide holes 845 and 846 from the front side side surface of the plate-shaped portion 841a. , A connecting convex portion having the same convex length as the peripheral convex portion 841b, which is convex along an arc centered on the shaft rod portion 843 and is continuously formed with the peripheral convex portion 841b in the rotational direction. The 841c, the outer frame cylindrical portion 841d extending from the periphery of the plate-shaped portion 841a to the opposite side of the peripheral convex portion 841b, and the first guide hole in the same direction as the extension direction of the outer frame extending portion 841d. A first cylindrical portion 841e extending in a cylindrical shape around the 845 and a cylindrical portion extending around the second guide hole 846 in a direction parallel to the first tubular portion 841e with the same extending length. A second cylindrical portion 841f to be provided, and a shaft rod fitting portion 841 g formed from a shape that is extended with the same extension length as the second tubular portion 841f and into which the shaft rod portion 843 can be fitted. From the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 841, a pair of positioning pins 841h having a small-diameter positioning portion at both sides of a straight line passing through the shaft rod portion 843 are projected in a columnar shape, and the pair of positioning pins 841h are connected. Mainly a pair of screw-in column portions 841i, which are formed in columns on both sides of a straight line that intersects the straight line and passes through the shaft rod portion 843, and a screw hole into which a screw can be screwed is formed at the convex tip. Be prepared.

As described above, the weight of the front main body portion 841 is reduced as compared with the case where the front side main body portion 841 has a thickness corresponding to the length of the outer frame tubular portion 841d and is formed of a disk shape packed by that thickness. Can be done. As a result, the driving force required for rotation can be reduced.

The first tubular portion 841e is formed so as to be inclined so that the side surface in the lateral direction becomes wider toward the extending end portion from the plate-shaped portion 841a (see FIG. 21). As a result, the sphere that has entered the first tubular portion 841e can be smoothly discharged to the back surface side, and at the time of molding, it is easy to perform the step of removing the mold member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the first tubular portion 841e. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of product defects.

The second tubular portion 841f is a partial lid portion extended to the shaft rod portion 843 side in a manner of narrowing the opening area of the second tubular portion 841f from the extended end portion of the side wall portion on the side far from the shaft rod portion 843. It is a plate-shaped portion that connects 841f1 and the inner peripheral surface of the second tubular portion 841f and the partial lid portion 841f1. Approx. It is provided with a recessed portion 841f3 recessed from the extending base portion (plate-shaped portion 841a) side.

The second tubular portion 841f is formed so as to be inclined so that both side surfaces along the straight line TL widen toward the extending end portion. Therefore, when the sphere is arranged on the second tubular portion 841f in a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the second tubular portion 841f is along the direction of gravity, the sphere moves toward the back side along the inclination of the side surface of the second tubular portion 841f. Start rolling.

In the pair of inclined plate portions 841f2, the facing surfaces are arranged at a distance of about the radius ra of the sphere, and the end portion on the side far from the partial lid portion 841f1 is arranged at the center position in the extending direction of the second tubular portion 841f. At the same time, it projects from the side surface of the second cylindrical portion 841f on the side far from the shaft rod portion 843 along the straight line NL to the shaft rod portion 843 side by about half of the radius ra of the sphere.

The recessed portion 841f3 is centered at the center position in the longitudinal direction (straight line NL) of the opening of the second tubular portion 841f, and is evenly arranged in the longitudinal direction toward the extended end portion of the second tubular portion 841f. In the present embodiment, the recessed width is gradually expanded, and in the present embodiment, the radius of the sphere is about ra (about 5.5 [mm]) at the extended end portion, and the sphere is located near the plate-shaped portion 841a. It is about half of the radius ra of.

The convex length of the columnar portion of the positioning pin 841h is the same as the convex length of the screw-in column portion 841i, and the convex length is the extended length of the first tubular portion 841e and the second tubular portion 841f. It is shorter than that (in this embodiment, only the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped portion 842a of the back side main body portion 842).

The back surface side main body portion 842 has a disk-shaped plate-shaped portion 842a formed with a diameter of the outer peripheral surface smaller than the diameter of the inner peripheral surface of the outer frame tubular portion 841d, and a first tubular portion 841e and a second. The insertion hole 842b drilled in the plate-shaped portion 842a with an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 841f and the shaft rod fitting portion 841g, and slightly larger than the positioning portion of the positioning pin 841h at a position corresponding to the positioning pin 841h. A pair of positioning holes 842c drilled with a large diameter, a pair of screw receiving holes 842d drilled so that screws can be inserted at positions matching the threaded column portion 841i, and a regular back surface of the plate-shaped portion 842a. It is densely arranged in the plate-shaped portion 842a, and is innumerably convex from the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 842a with the same convex length, and is provided with a tapered convex portion 842e formed from a shape in which the convex tip is tapered.

The insertion hole 842b is a portion that penetrates into the gap between the first tubular portion 841e and the shaft rod fitting portion 841g, and includes an penetration portion 842b1 in which the facing distance is narrower than the other portions. The intrusion portion 842b1 acts as a portion for preventing an assembly error of the back side main body portion 842 (see FIG. 17 (c)).

The tapered convex portion 842e is a portion that reduces the frictional force generated between the tapered convex portion 842e and the main body plate portion 811 of the base member 810 that is arranged so as to face each other. That is, since the tapered convex portion 842e is formed from the innumerable tapered convex portions, the contact between the back surface side surface of the rotary disk 840 and the front surface side surface of the base member 810 becomes point contact. Since the number of voids at the time of contact increases, the generated frictional force can be reduced. Thereby, the operating resistance due to the contact of the rotating disk 840 with the base member 810 can be reduced.

17 (a) is a front view of the rotary disk 840, and FIG. 17 (b) is a sectional view of the rotary disk 840 in the line XVIIb-XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a), FIG. 17 (c). Is a rear view of the rotary disk 840, and FIG. 18 is a schematic front view of the rotary disk 840 from which only the outer shape of the rotary disk 840 is extracted. Note that FIG. 18 shows the outer shape of each guide hole 845,846 at the front end.

As shown in FIG. 17B, the back side main body portion 842 is arranged on the back side of the front side main body portion 841 on the back side end surface. As a result, in the assembled state (see FIG. 9), the back side main body portion 842 can be arranged between the main body plate portion 811 of the base member 810 and the front side main body portion 841, so that the back side main body portion 842 comes into contact with the main body plate portion 811. The location can be limited to the back side main body portion 842.

Further, a gap VA is continuously formed in a ring shape between the outer frame cylindrical portion 841d and the outer peripheral end of the back surface side main body portion 842. That is, the space INNE between the front main body portion 841 and the back side main body portion 842 and the outer space OUT are continuously connected through the ring-shaped gap VA.

Therefore, by creating an air flow, it is possible to exchange air in the space INNE and the space OUTE, and to discharge the air from one space to the other space. In the present embodiment, since the ring-shaped gap VA is formed on the back side of the front side main body portion 841, when air is discharged from the space INE, it is discharged exclusively to the back side of the front side main body portion 841. be able to. In the present embodiment, the substrate 862 is arranged on the back side of the front side main body portion 841, and the space between the front side main body portion 841 and the substrate 862 is not partitioned (between the main body plate portion 811 and the separation frame plate 815). Since it is connected in space), the air discharged from the space INNE can be applied to the substrate 862. As a result, the electronic components arranged on the substrate 862 can be cooled.

As shown in FIG. 17C, the insertion hole 842b of the back side main body portion 842 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the collar member 844. Therefore, the back side main body portion 842 can be attached to and detached from the front side main body portion 841 regardless of the presence or absence of the collar member 844.

<About posture adjustment>
A method of adjusting the posture when assembling the back side main body portion 842 to the front side main body portion 841 will be described. Since the back side main body portion 842 is fastened and fixed to the front side main body portion 841 in a state where the invading portion 842b1 has invaded the gap between the first tubular portion 841e and the shaft rod fitting portion 841g, it is the first in the assembly work. In addition, the intrusion portion 842b1 is arranged in the gap between the first cylindrical portion 841e and the shaft rod fitting portion 841g in a state where the central portion of the insertion hole 842b is aligned with the fitting shaft rod portion 841g.

In this state, if the front and back of the back side main body portion 842 are correct, the positions of the positioning hole 842b and the positioning pin 841h match, and the positions of the screw-in pillar portion 841i and the screw receiving hole 842d match, and the back surface. The side main body portion 842 can be fastened and fixed to the front side main body portion 841.

On the other hand, if the front and back of the back side main body portion 842 are reversed, the positions of the positioning hole 842b and the positioning pin 841h do not match, and the positions of the screwed column portion 841i and the screw receiving hole 842d do not match. It is possible to make the operator notice that the front and back sides of the back side main body portion 842 are reversed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the assembling work from being continued with the front and back sides of the back side main body portion 842 reversed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the posture of the rear side main body portion 842 can be quickly adjusted by matching the arrangement of the intrusion portion 842b1, and the positioning pin 841h, the screw-in pillar portion 841i, the positioning hole 842c, and the screw receiving hole 842d can be quickly adjusted. Since it can be fastened and fixed only when the positional relationship with is correct, it is possible to prevent an assembly error in which the front and back sides are reversed. This makes it possible to improve the work efficiency of the assembly work.

As shown in FIG. 18, the first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 are different in arrangement and shape with respect to the shaft rod portion 843. The maximum length (longitudinal width) of the first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 in the longitudinal direction (direction of the straight line NL) is set to be the same. Hereinafter, the arrangement of the first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 will be described in detail.

The first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 have the same common straight line TL passing through the central axis of the shaft rod portion 843 and the lateral direction, and the straight line NL orthogonal to the straight line TL and the longitudinal direction. Is a long hole-shaped through hole that is the same. That is, the first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 are arranged so as to be parallel in the longitudinal direction, and the straight line TL is arranged at the center position in the longitudinal direction.

The first guide hole 845 has a length R1 between the shaft rod portion 843 and the inner surface on the side closer to the shaft rod portion 843 (distance at the shortest position), and is far from the shaft rod portion 843 and the shaft rod portion 843. The distance from the inner surface of the side is set to the length R2, respectively.

The second guide hole 846 has a length R3 in which the distance (distance at the shortest position) between the shaft rod portion 843 and the inner surface on the side closer to the shaft rod portion 843 is shorter than the length R1 (R3 <R1). The distance between the shaft rod portion 843 and the inner surface on the side far from the shaft rod portion 843 is set to the length R4, and the distance between the shaft rod portion 843 and the extended tip of the partial lid portion 841f1 is set to the length R5. (R3 <R5 <R4).

A description will be given by returning from FIG. 12 to FIG. The front cover 850 is arranged on the front side of the rotating disk 840, and is extended below the shielding plate portion 851 that covers about two-thirds of the vertical dimension of the rotating main body portion 841 and the shielding plate portion 851. The sensor support portion 852 that covers the through elongated holes 814 to prevent the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 from coming off, and the shielding plate portion 851 and the base member 810 are extended in a plate shape from the back surface side of the shielding plate portion 851 toward the base member 810. It is provided with a connecting plate portion 853 for connecting the above.

The shielding plate portion 851 is made of a light-transmitting resin material so that the rotating disc 840 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized from the front side, and the left and right side surfaces follow the outer shape of the rotating main body portion 841. It is said to be a shape. This makes it possible to easily associate the decoration of the shielding plate portion 851 with the decoration of the rotating main body portion 841.

The shielding plate portion 851 includes a recessed support portion 851a that is recessed downward about a straight line that passes through the shaft rod portion 842 and faces in the vertical direction. The recessed support portion 851a positions the inclined portion 871 of the rolling flow path portion 870, which will be described later.

The surface of the connecting plate portion 853 on the side facing the rotating main body portion 841 is curved along the arc shape of the rotating main body portion 841.

The left and right covers 860 include a pair of left and right decorative portions 861 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810, and a pair of left and right substrates 862 that are fastened and fixed to the back side of the base member 810.

The decorative portion 861 is a decorative plate portion 861a which is a plate-shaped portion extending along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 842, and the decorative plate portion 861a from the side surface on the side far from the shaft rod portion 842 to the back side. The outer frame plate 861b that is extended in a plate shape and abuts on the separation frame plate 815, and the shield plate portion that is extended in a plate shape from the side surface of the decorative plate 861a close to the shaft rod portion 842 toward the back side. It is provided with an inner frame plate 861c slightly overhanging on the back surface side of the 851.

The decorative plate portion 861a is screwed into the fastening portion 861a1 as one of the portions for screwing the screws inserted into the base member 810 and the fastening portion arranged at the rear end portion of the rolling flow path portion 870. It is provided with a through hole 861a2 through which a screw rod portion of a screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted and a head is locked. That is, in the fastening portion 861a1, the screw inserted into the support portion 815a1 is screwed into the fastening portion to be fastened and fixed, and the screw is fastened and fixed to the rolling flow path portion 870 with the through hole 861a2 interposed therebetween.

The inner side surface of the inner frame plate 861c facing the shielding plate portion 851 has an arc shape having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shielding plate portion 851. As a result, even if the shielding plate portion 851 is about to be displaced, the displacement can be regulated by the inner frame plate 861c. Therefore, the shielding plate portion 851 can be formed of a thin member.

According to this configuration, the inner frame plate 861b is arranged only on the front side of the rotating main body portion 841 and does not project to a position where it is arranged facing the outer circumference.

The substrate 862 is arranged at a position that prevents access to the support portion 815a1 from the back surface side in a fastened and fixed state (see FIG. 12). Therefore, since the structure is such that the fastening of the decorative portion 861 cannot be released without removing the substrate 862, it is possible to prevent the decorative portion 861 from being illegally removed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the rolling flow path portion 870 fixed to the decorative portion 861 from changing, and thus it is possible to prevent the detection sensor SC1 from illegally passing the ball.

The lower end of the rolling flow path portion 870 is placed on the recessed support portion 851a and is formed as a plate-shaped portion having an inverted C-shaped cross section (see FIG. 13), and the upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward the back surface side. An inclined portion 871, a downward extending portion 872 extending downward with a dimension larger than the recessed support portion 851a at the tip portion of the inclined portion 871, and a rolling flow path portion 870 on the left side of the inclined portion 871. A triangular plate-shaped tilt prevention portion 873 that projects to the front side at the bottom surface and surface position, and an L-shaped ball rolling path that bends from the left-right direction to the front-back direction at the tilted portion 871. It is provided with a forming portion 874.

In the present embodiment, the rolling path forming portion 874 is designed so that the time required for the received ball to reach the inclined portion 871 after passing through the communication opening 654 is less than one second.

The arrangement of the front cover 850, the left and right covers 860, and the rolling flow path portion 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (a) is a top view of the ball staging device 800, FIG. 19 (b) is a partial front view of the ball staging device 800, and FIG. 19 (c) is the XIXc- of FIG. 19 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the sphere staging apparatus 800 in the XIXc line.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the rolling flow path portion 870 is arranged at a position where the back side end portion of the inclined portion 871 is slightly spaced from the front side end portion of the rotating disk 840. .. That is, the through hole 861a2 of the decorative portion 861 is arranged so that the rear end portion of the inclined portion 871 of the rolling flow path portion 870 does not abut on the front side end portion of the rotating disk 840 by fastening and fixing. The front-back position is set. This makes it possible to prevent the rotary disk 840 and the rolling flow path portion 870 from coming into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the upper end surface of the shielding plate portion 851 of the front cover 850 is designed to have a shape that matches (contacts with the surface) the shape of the lower end surface of the rolling flow path portion 870. Therefore, the rolling prevention portion 873 and the upper end surface of the shielding plate portion 851 come into contact with each other on the surface. By this contact, it is possible to prevent the rolling flow path portion 870 from being displaced in the forward tilting direction due to the weight of the sphere or the like.

As shown in FIG. 19C, in the present embodiment, the vertical position of the inclined portion 871 is defined by the recessed support portion 851a as the alignment of the rolling flow path portion 870, and the downward extending portion 872 is a shielding plate. Since the positional relationship is such that the back surface of the portion 851 can be in contact with the back surface, it is possible to prevent the rolling flow path portion 870 from being displaced in the rising direction during assembly.

That is, the rolling flow path portion 870 can be prevented from being displaced in the forward tilting direction and being displaced in the rising direction due to the contact with the shielding plate portion 851, and thus the posture of the rolling flow path portion 870. Since the stability of the rolling flow path portion 870 can be improved, the positional relationship between the rolling flow path portion 870 and the rotating disk 840 can be maintained for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the rolling flow path portion 870 and the rotating disk 840 from changing, which hinders the production.

Next, the change in the state of the ball effect device 800 will be described. As described above, in the ball effect device 800 of the present embodiment, the rotary disk 840 that rotates by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 is on the ball passage path (rolling) between the base member 810 and the rolling flow path portion 870. It is arranged on a straight line connecting the inclined portion 871 as the end of the flow path forming portion 874 and the first through hole KH1 for receiving the sphere in the base member 810 (see FIG. 23).

Here, by setting the posture of the rotating disk 840, the rotating disk is formed on a straight line connecting the inclined portion 871 as the end of the rolling path forming portion 874 and the first through hole KH1 for receiving the sphere in the base member 810. When the first guide hole 845 of the 840 is arranged (first receiving state), when the second guide hole 846 of the rotary disk 840 is arranged (second receiving state), the first guide hole 845 is also the first. 2 It is possible to form a case where the guide hole 846 is not arranged (receipt prevention state). These will be described in order.

The first receiving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. 20 is a front view of the ball staging device 800 in the first receiving state, and FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the ball staging device 800 in the XXI-XXI line of FIG. 20. In FIG. 20, the front cover 850 and the rolling flow path portion 870 are omitted for ease of understanding, and the patterns of the peripheral convex portion 841b, the connecting convex portion 841c, and the left and right cover 860 are omitted. Only the outer shape of the inclined portion 871 is shown, and the outer shapes of the first through hole KH1 and the second through hole KH2 are shown by an imaginary line (two-dot chain line). In FIG. 20, the outer shape of the sphere immediately before being placed on the inclined portion 871 and guided to the rotating disk 840 is shown as a reference.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first receiving state, the sphere supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870 and reaching the inclined portion 871 flows down along the inclination of the inclined portion 871 and reaches the first guide hole 845. You will be guided. Here, the vertical length Rh of the first through hole KH1 and the shaft rod portion 843 is the length between the shaft side wall portion and the shaft rod portion 843 at the extended end portion of the first tubular portion 841e. It is set shorter than R1a (R1> R1a) (R1a> Rh). Therefore, the ball guided to the first guide hole 845 passes through the first tubular portion 841e, flows into the first through hole KH1, rolls the first partition plate 813a, and then right of the second partition plate 813b. It passes through one region (see FIG. 13) and passes through the detection sensor SC1 (see FIG. 9) disposed in the through slot 814 in the assembled state. That is, in the first receiving state, as long as the ball is supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870, the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1.

The second receiving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. 22 is a front view of the ball staging device 800 in the second receiving state, and FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the ball staging device 800 in the line XXIII-XXIII of FIG. 22. In FIG. 22, the front cover 850 and the rolling flow path portion 870 are omitted for ease of understanding, and the patterns of the peripheral convex portion 841b, the connecting convex portion 841c, and the left and right cover 860 are omitted. Only the outer shape of the inclined portion 871 is shown, and the outer shapes of the first through hole KH1 and the second through hole KH2 are shown by an imaginary line (two-dot chain line). Further, as shown in FIG. 22, in the second receiving state, the center position in the width direction of the inclined portion 871 (the lower end position of the inverted C shape) is the axial direction of the shaft rod portion 843 and the shaft rod portions 843 and the second. It is arranged on a plane SQ1 (see FIG. 17) formed by a linear direction connecting the central positions of the tubular portion 841f in the longitudinal direction. In FIG. 22, the outer shape of the sphere immediately before being placed on the inclined portion 871 and guided to the rotating disk 840 is shown as a reference.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the second receiving state, the sphere supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870 and reaching the inclined portion 871 flows down along the inclination of the inclined portion 871 and reaches the second guide hole 846. You will be guided. Here, the vertical length Rh of the first through hole KH1 and the shaft rod portion 843 is set to have a dimension slightly longer than the length R3 (Rh ≧ R3). Further, by arranging the recessed portion 841f3 on the lower surface of the passage path of the sphere in the second tubular portion 841f, the lower end portion of the sphere that rolls on the second tubular portion 841f enters the inside of the recessed portion 841f3. Therefore, the lower end position of the sphere is arranged below the lower surface of the second guide hole 846. Therefore, the ball guided to the second guide hole 846 enters the inside of the recessed portion 841f3 before passing through the second tubular portion 841f, and stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1. That is, in the second receiving state, even when a ball is supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870, the ball is on the front side of the first through hole KH1 before passing through the detection sensor SC1 (see FIG. 9). Stay at.

The ball staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 passes through the first through hole KH1 by being subsequently pushed out by the ball supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870. This will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

24 (a) to 24 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the rolling flow path portion 870, the second tubular portion 841f, and the first through hole KH1 in the XXIII-XXIII line of FIG. 22. In addition, in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c), the spheres P11 and P12 supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870 are shown. That is, in FIG. 24A, the state in which the sphere P11 is retained on the front side of the first through hole KH1, and in FIG. 24B, the state in which the sphere P12 collides with the sphere P11 from the front side is shown in FIG. 24. In (c), the state in which the sphere P11 is extruded by the sphere P12 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the recessed width of the recessed portion 841f3 at the extended end of the second tubular portion 841f3 is set to be about the same as the radius ra of the sphere, so that the lower end portion of the sphere P11 is the upper surface of the recessed portion 841f3. It stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1 in a state where it enters downward from the bottom by about half the length of the radius ra of the sphere. That is, the sphere P11 stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1 in a state where the center of the sphere P11 is arranged above the lower end of the first through hole KH1 (see FIG. 24 (a)).

When the sphere P12 flows down toward the sphere P11 with the sphere P11 staying, the sphere P12 flows down along the inclination with the center of the sphere aligned with the center in the width direction (on the plane SQ1) of the inclined portion 871. On the other hand, since the sphere P11 stays in the recessed portion 841f3, the center of the recessed portion 841f3 in the width direction and the center of the sphere coincide with each other in the width direction of the recessed portion 841f3. The center of the sphere is also arranged on the plane SQ1 like the sphere P12. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the center position of the sphere P11 and the sphere P12 is set in FIG. 24 by controlling the center position of the inclined portion 871 in the width direction to be arranged on the plane SQ1 in the second receiving state. It can be maintained on the plane SQ1 from (a) to FIG. 24 (b). Therefore, the load applied from the sphere P12 to the sphere P11 can be made to act on the plane SQ1 and can be suppressed from deviating in the left-right direction (direction orthogonal to the plane SQ1).

The load from the sphere P12 causes the sphere P11 to be loaded by maintaining the center positions of the sphere P11 and the sphere P12 on the plane SQ1 and arranging the center of the sphere P11 above the lower end of the first through hole KH1. It can be efficiently used as a propulsive force for pushing out to the back side, and the ball P11 can flow into the first through hole KH1. After pushing out the sphere P11, the sphere P12 stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1 (replaces the sphere P11).

The receipt prevention state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. 25 and 26 are front views of the ball staging device 800 in an example of the reception prevention state. In FIGS. 25 and 26, the front cover 850 and the rolling flow path portion 870 are omitted for ease of understanding, and the patterns of the peripheral convex portion 841b, the connecting convex portion 841c, and the left and right cover 860 are shown. Omitted, only the outer shape of the inclined portion 871 is shown, and the outer shapes of the first through hole KH1 and the second through hole KH2 are shown by an imaginary line (two-dot chain line).

In FIG. 25, a state in which the rotating disk 840 is rotated by about 60 ° in the rotation direction CW in the front view clockwise from the second receiving state (see FIG. 22) is shown, and in FIG. 26, from the state shown in FIG. 25. The state in which the rotary disk 840 is rotated by about 180 ° in the rotation direction CW is shown.

Here, when the rotary disk 840 rotates in the rotation direction CW while the sphere P11 illustrated in FIG. 24 stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1, the second guide hole 846 is the lower end of the first through hole KH1. The sphere P11 also moves below the lower end of the first through hole KH1 as it moves downward, and the sphere P11 cannot pass through the first through hole KH1. That is, during the movement of the rotating disk 840, the sphere P11 is maintained inside the second cylindrical portion 841f formed on the back surface side of the second guide hole 846 (see FIG. 25). The sphere P11 is maintained in the second tubular portion 841f until the first through hole KH1 or the second through hole KH2 is arranged again on the back surface side of the second guide hole 846.

In FIG. 26, the second through hole KH2 is arranged on the back surface side of the second guide hole 846, but the partial lid portion 841f1 is arranged on the path through which the sphere P11 flows down, and the sphere P11 is arranged by the partial lid portion 841f1. Is regulated to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 26, the arc portion on the side far from the shaft rod portion 843 of the second through hole KH2 is centered on the shaft rod portion 843 whose distance from the shaft rod portion 843 is the same as the length R5. It is formed in the shape of an arc.

Therefore, when the rotary disk 840 rotates about 30 ° in the rotation direction CW from the state shown in FIG. 26, the partial lid portion 841f1 is arranged on the left side of the second through hole KH2 and deviates from the flow path of the ball P11 ( (Out of the area diagonally below the back side of the sphere P11). Therefore, the sphere P11 can flow down to the back surface side along the inclination of the second tubular portion 841f and pass through the second through hole KH2 without being restricted by the partial lid portion 841f1. In this case, the inclination of the inclined plate portion 841f2 functions as a guide portion for moving the sphere P11 toward the second through hole KH2 when the sphere P11 is displaced to the left. Here, the relative movement performed by the sphere P11 maintained inside the second cylindrical portion 841f that is displaced (changes in posture and position) with the rotation of the rotating disk 840 will be described.

27 is a front perspective view of the second tubular portion 841f, and FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (c) are front views of the second tubular portion 841f showing a change in posture of the second tubular portion 841f. Is. In addition, in FIGS. 27 and 28 (a) to 28 (c), the movement of the sphere P11 maintained in the second cylindrical portion 841f is shown. Further, in FIG. 27, a portion where the line of sight is blocked by the plate-shaped portion 841a is shown by a hidden line, and a portion where the line of sight is not blocked by the plate-shaped portion 841a is shown by a solid line.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 (a), in a state where the sphere P11 is arranged between the pair of inclined plate portions 841f2, the sphere P11 is partially inside the pair of inclined plate portions 841f2 (between facing surfaces). It is supported in a state of being intruded.

From the state shown in FIG. 28 (a), as the rotating disk 840 is rotated in the rotation direction CW, the sphere P11 causes one inclined plate portion 841f2 on the lower side (right side in FIG. 28 (b)). While moving over the second tubular portion 841f, the center position of the sphere P11 is arranged below the inclined plate portion 841f2 in a state where the longitudinal direction of the opening of the second tubular portion 841f is along the vertical direction. (See FIG. 28 (c)).

Here, when the sphere P11 gets over the inclined plate portion 841f2, the sphere P11 is urged to the front side because a load toward the front side is applied to the sphere P11 from the inclined plate portion 841f2 due to the inclination thereof. Therefore, even if the second guide hole 846 and the second through hole KH2 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction during the displacement from FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (c) (see FIG. 26), the sphere P11 is inclined. Sufficient speed for the second guide hole 846 to pass through the second through hole KH2 while being urged to the front side by the plate portion 841f2 (maintenance speed SV, speed of half rotation in one second in this embodiment). When the rotary disk 840 rotates in, the rotary disk 840 is rotated in the rotation direction CW from FIG. 26 while the sphere P11 is maintained in the second tubular portion 841f, and returns to the second receiving state (see FIG. 22). It becomes possible.

That is, depending on whether the rotating disk 840 rotates at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV or at a speed higher than the maintenance speed SV, whether the sphere P11 is discharged from the state of FIG. 26 through the second through hole KH2. It is possible to switch whether the sphere P11 returns to the second receiving state while being maintained by the second tubular portion 841f. In the present embodiment, as the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840, a speed of a plurality of stages larger than the maintenance speed SV and a speed less than the maintenance speed SV (discharge speed MDV) are prepared.

In FIG. 28, as an example, the case where the sphere P11 moves from between the pair of inclined plate portions 841f2 has been described, but in this case, the sphere P11 is urged from the inclined plate portion 841f2 toward the front side. It is not limited to. For example, when returning from the state shown in FIG. 28 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 28 (a) via FIG. 28 (b) (when the rotating disk 840 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction CW), The ball P11 is urged toward the front side from the inclined plate portion 841f2. That is, in a state where the inclined plate portion 841f2 is arranged below the center position of the sphere P11, when the sphere P11 gets over the inclined plate portion 841f2, the sphere P11 is on the front side from the inclined plate portion 841f2 regardless of the direction. Be urged towards.

When the sphere P11 returns to the second receiving state while being maintained by the second tubular portion 841f, the sphere P11 swings in the longitudinal direction of the second tubular portion 841f (the second tubular portion 841f of the sphere P11). However, in the present embodiment, the ball enters (catch) and is decelerated by the recessed portion 841f3 arranged at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the second cylindrical portion 841f. , The sphere P11 can be arranged in the recessed portion 841f3 in a short period of time.

In the second receiving state (see FIGS. 22 to 24), the second guide hole 846 is arranged on the uppermost side with respect to the first through hole KH1. That is, as the rotary disk 840 rotates from the second receiving state, the second guide hole 846 is arranged below the second receiving state, so that the ball staying in the second guide hole 846 rotates. It is possible to prevent the disk 840 from flowing down (performing irregular flow) through the first through hole KH1 during rotation.

<Direction 1. Prevent technical intervention by single shot. Keep hitting to prevent over-winning>
An example of an effect using the ball effect device 800 (first effect example) will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. 29 and 30 show an example of the time change of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a in the first operation pattern and the time change of the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 in the first effect example. It is a figure which showed an example.

In addition, in FIG. 29, an example of the case where the big hit game is performed without stopping the ball, and in FIG. 30, the case where the big hit game is performed over a longer time than in FIG. 29 while appropriately stopping the ball. An example (as an example, when the time of the round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds) of the operating time T1) is shown. The scales of the widths of FIGS. 29 and 30 are reference scales and are not exact.

Further, in FIGS. 29 and 30, it is illustrated that the case where the rotary disk 840 is maintained in the first receiving state and the case where the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the second receiving state can be switched. In this case, the term "maintained" is not limited to the case where the rotary disk 840 is stopped. For example, the rotary disk 840 rotates in a short time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) and returns to the same state again. Including the case of returning.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, the two circles marked along with the timed change of the ball effecting device 800 indicate how many balls stay on the front side of the through holes KH1 and KH2. In FIGS. 29 and 30, a circle indicating the state after the change is shown at the time when the number of stays changes. In the following drawings, the meanings of the two circles written together with the time change of the ball staging device 800 are the same.

For example, if both of the two circles are white circles, the number of staying spheres is 0, and if one circle is a white circle and the remaining one circle is a black circle, the number of staying spheres is zero. It is shown that the number of spheres is one, and that if the two circles are both black circles, the number of spheres to stay is two. As described above, if two balls are retained when the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 is in the second receiving state, the previously retained balls are pushed out, pass through the first through hole KH1, and are detected. Since it is detected by the sensor SC1, in this production example, immediately after the two circles become black circles, a sphere is detected by the detection sensor SC1 and one circle changes to a white circle.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the rotary disk 840, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot A, the MPU 201 drives and controls the large opening solenoid so that the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 operate based on the first operation pattern. The MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 drives and controls the drive motor KM1 so that the rotary disk 840 operates based on the first effect example.

In the MPU 201, when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the timer means (not shown) has the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to hold the opening / closing plate 651 in the closed state (closed state), and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the large opening solenoid is opened so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 651 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 650a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 651 operates for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 651 is displaced to the closed state and the large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to close the second specified winning opening 650a, and the first round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 651 of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state (closed state), and the second round game R is started after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

Further, when the operating time TSa, which is a sufficient time (35 seconds in the present embodiment) for the operating time T1 of the first round round game R to elapse, has elapsed from the start of the first round round game R, it is stored. The plate 657 is switched from the regulated state to the allowable state for several seconds (a sufficient time for the ball to pass, 0.5 seconds in this embodiment), and then the solenoid for the storage plate is driven and controlled so as to return to the regulated state. As a result, among the balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 650a in the first round game R, the balls that have come into contact with the right side of the storage plate 657 and have stagnated are guided to the communication opening 654.

The MPU 221 has an operating time TSS (14 seconds in this embodiment) shorter than the time elapsed from the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect) to the end of the first round game R in the shortest time. Occasionally, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled so that the rotary disk 840 is switched from the first receiving state to the second receiving state and held in the second receiving state. Therefore, after the end of the first round game R, the ball that has flowed down through the communication opening 654 is received by the second guide hole 846 and stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1.

In this production example, the first guide hole 845 is arranged on the front side of the first through hole KH1 for about 4 seconds from the start of the first round game R, and the first through hole is formed by one ball. Since it is in a state where it can pass through KH1, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to rapidly advance the first round game R.

In the second round, the MPU 201 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and closes the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 (similar to the start of the first round). The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to displace from the closed state) to the open state (open state) to open the first specific winning opening 65a, so that the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 operates for a long time. ..

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is displaced to the closed state (closed state) to close the first specific winning opening 65a, and the second round round game R ends. .. The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set to 2 seconds.

After that, similarly, the third to ninth round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to be displaced between the (closed state) and the open state (open state) and open / close the first specific winning opening 65a.

In the 10th round, as in the start of the 1st round, the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is closed (closed state). ) Is displaced from the open state (open state) to open the second specific winning opening 650a by driving and controlling the large opening opening solenoid to cause the opening / closing plate 651 to operate for a long time.

Further, when the operating time TSa, which is a sufficient time (35 seconds in the present embodiment) for the operating time T1 of the 10th round round game R to elapse, has elapsed from the start of the 10th round round game R, it is stored. The plate 657 is switched from the regulated state to the allowable state for several seconds (a sufficient time for the ball to pass, 0.5 seconds in this embodiment), and then the solenoid for the storage plate is driven and controlled so as to return to the regulated state. As a result, among the balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 650a in the 10th round round game R, the balls that have come into contact with the right side of the storage plate 657 and have stagnated are guided to the communication opening 654.

The MPU221 is the time elapsed from the end of the 10th round game R in FIG. 29 until the ball passing through the communication opening 654 reaches the inclined portion 871 (up to the 9th round as shown in FIG. 29). , 122 seconds, which is the time when 6 seconds (8 seconds in total with the first interval time Int1 between rounds) is required for each round game R, and the 10th round game R in FIG. Time until the ball passing through the communication opening 654 reaches the inclined portion 871 after the end of the above (as shown in FIG. 30, until the 9th round, 30 seconds in the round game R of each round (round). The specified time TEc (200 seconds in this embodiment), which is the time between the first interval time (32 seconds in total with Int1) and the time (288 seconds), is the special figure variation display (design). When a lapse of time from the end of the variation effect), the rotary disk 840 is rotated once at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV, and then the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the second receiving state.

Therefore, if the timing at which the ball passes through the communication opening 654 and flows down after the end of the 10th round round game R is before the specified time TEc has elapsed from the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect), that The ball can be made to collide with the ball staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 after the round game R of the first round, and the previously staying ball is made to flow to the back side of the first through hole KH1. , The sphere can be detected by the detection sensor SC1 (see FIG. 24).

On the other hand, if the timing at which the ball passes through the communication opening 654 and flows down after the end of the 10th round round game R is after the specified time TEc has elapsed from the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). The ball that has accumulated on the front side of the first through hole KH1 after the first round game R is discharged from the second through hole KH2 in advance and is detected by the detection sensor SC2 (see FIG. 26).

Therefore, the ball that flows down through the communication opening 654 after the end of the 10th round game R is received by the empty second guide hole 846 and stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1. Therefore, since the sphere does not pass through the first through hole KH1, the sphere is not detected by the detection sensor SC1, and as will be described later, this sphere is detected by the detection sensor SC2.

After that, in the MPU 201, as in the second to ninth rounds, the eleventh round to the fifteenth round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs. Then, the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is displaced between the closed state (closed state) and the open state (open state), and the large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to open / close the first specific winning opening 65a. ..

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the 15th round round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is displaced to the closed state (closed state) to close the first specific winning opening 65a, and the 15th round round game R is completed. ..

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

The MPU221 rotates the rotary disk 840 once at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R in the 15th round, and then the drive motor KM1 so as to hold the rotary disk 840 in the first receiving state. Is driven and controlled. As a result, after the end of the 10th round game R, the ball staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 is discharged through the second through hole KH2, and the ball is detected by the detection sensor SC2.

According to this operation pattern, whether or not the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1 depending on whether the timing at which the ball is guided to the rotating disk 840 after the 10th round game R is before or after the specified time TEc. Can be changed.

That is, the ball can be passed through the detection sensor SC1 if it is before the specified time TEc. Therefore, due to the ball passing through the detection sensor SC1, a notification related to the interest of the player (for example, a notification of whether or not the current gaming state is a probabilistic state (notification of whether or not it is a latent probable change)). ) And notification of round promotion), it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to proceed with the round game quickly.

The mode of notification is not limited in any way, and for example, a specific voice (for example, "next is probable", "next is normal", etc.) may be output from the voice output device 226. However, the lamp display device 227 emits light in a specific light emitting mode (for example, emitting light in rainbow colors as an indicator of latent probability change, or raising the expectation that the latent probability changes in the order of blue, green, or red). It may be a mode in which the lighting units 29 to 33 issue the lamp. Further, the display of the jackpot symbol in the third symbol display device 81 may be changed to an advantageous symbol (for example, a display symbol of the jackpot A which is more advantageous than the display symbol of the jackpot C) (promotion effect).

As a result, it is possible to suppress a single hit during the jackpot game. In the single shot, the number of balls is one less than the specified number in order to aim for the winning of the number of balls exceeding the specified number (for example, 10) scheduled to be won in the specific winning openings 65a, 650a in the round game R. Is a method of striking to form a winning state. The round game R of each round utilizes the fact that it continues for 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1, until a specified number of balls are won, and the time is fully used to make a single shot. The person who hits adjusts the number of winnings. With a number of balls that are one less than the specified number, the number of balls that exceeds the specified number can be won by firing the balls with the aim of having multiple balls collectively win the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. You can expect it.

On the other hand, there is a tendency for a difference in the number of payouts in the jackpot game between a player who makes a single hit and a player who does not make a single hit (if the number of winnings is different from the specified number by one, the difference is 15 and 1 in all rounds. If the pieces are different, 150 pieces (the number of balls equivalent to 600 yen in a game in which one ball is purchased for 4 yen)), in order to stabilize the profit that the player can obtain by the jackpot game (player's) Regardless of experience points, it is desirable to regulate single-shot hits (in order to construct a gaming machine in which players can enjoy profits fairly). For example, depending on the game store, the clerk may alert the player who makes a single shot and stop the single shot, but in many cases the clerk's eyes are stolen and the single shot is made, so the effect is partial. It stayed in the thing.

On the other hand, according to this production example, the shorter the time required for the round game R to progress up to the 10th round, the easier it is for the ball to pass through the detection sensor SC1, and the ball uses the detection sensor SC1. Controlled to provide notifications related to the player's interests due to passage. As described above, in the case of single-shot hitting, it becomes difficult to pass the ball through the detection sensor SC1 because the time required for adjusting the number of winnings in the round game R of each round becomes long. Therefore, the notification related to the player's profit generated by the ball passing through the detection sensor SC1 is attractive to the player (for example, in a production mode in which it is difficult to understand that the game state has changed to the probabilistic state). If it is possible to determine the transition to the probable change state by the notification related to the profit of the player, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game can be determined to increase, etc.), the player is made to stop the single hit and each round. It is possible to improve the motivation to advance the round game R of the eyes quickly (unleashed).

The timing of notification caused by passing through the detection sensor SC1 can be arbitrarily set. For example, the notification may be performed immediately after the sphere is detected by the detection sensor SC1. In this case, since the jackpot game R is still in progress after the notification, the jackpot game R in the remaining rounds can be performed without rushing, so that after completing one set of jackpot games in 15 rounds, the game is continued. You can calmly proceed with the game you play.

Further, for example, the notification may be performed during the lapse of the ending time ED (after the lapse of time after the sphere is detected by the detection sensor SC1). In this case, since the content of the notification caused by passing through the detection sensor SC1 is undecided during the jackpot game, the player's attention to the notification can be maintained high until the end of the jackpot game.

Further, for example, it may be after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 5 minutes have elapsed) after the jackpot game is completed. In this case, the game can be continued while expecting the content of the notification for a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the player can grasp whether the situation is advantageous or unfavorable for the player (notification of whether or not it is in a probable change state), so that the player can feel at ease. You can choose whether or not to continue the game after that.

In this production example, the first guide hole 845 is arranged on the front side of the first through hole KH1 for about 4 seconds from the start of the first round game R, and the first through hole is formed by one ball. Since it is in a state where it can pass through KH1, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to rapidly advance the first round game R.

In this operation pattern, the round game R (the second variable winning device 650 is opened in this operation pattern) in which the ball flows down toward the rotating disk 840, and the round game R (the first in this operation pattern) immediately after that. The variable winning device 65 is released), and the variable winning devices 65 and 650 to be opened are switched. As a result, at the timing when the first ball is guided to the rotating disk 840, the player's line of sight is guided to the first variable winning device 65, so that the first ball is guided to the rotating disk 840. It is possible to easily prevent the player's line of sight from turning toward the rotating disk 840 at the timing. This makes it difficult for the player to know which of the guide holes 845 and 846 of the rotating disk 840 the ball has entered.

For example, a player who does not know which of the guide holes 845 and 846 of the rotating disk 840 the first ball has entered, the first ball stays on the front side of the rotating disk 840. Since it is not possible to know whether the sphere has passed through the first through hole KH1 or the second through hole KH2 by looking only at the situation where the sphere has not passed (because it is not known whether the sphere has passed through the detection sensor SC1). ), After it is determined that the second ball does not pass through the first through hole KH1, notification is performed based on the fact that the first ball has passed through the detection sensor SC1 (so-called "revival effect"). By doing), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Since it is desirable that the player's line of sight can be guided to the rotating disk 840 at the timing when the second ball is guided to the rotating disk 840, the opening round of the second variable winning device 650 is the tenth round. It may be the 15th round (final round) instead of. This makes it possible to prevent the player's line of sight from being guided to the first variable winning device 65.

Before the start of the jackpot game, it is desirable to notify the player of the intention of the operation of the ball effect device 800 in this effect example. For example, by displaying characters such as "There is a privilege if the jackpot round is advanced quickly" and "There is a privilege if the 10th round is passed within 200 seconds" on the third symbol display device 81. , It is possible to make the player understand that the profit is given to the player by rapidly advancing the jackpot game. In addition, if the number of seconds is constantly displayed and updated (countdown), it is possible to prevent the player from playing a big hit game indiscriminately.

Further, the above-mentioned notification is not limited to the notification by the third symbol display device 81. For example, the sound output device 226 may be used to generate the same sound, or the lamp display device may be used to relate the length of time remaining until the operation timing of the rotating disk 840 to the emission color (for example, time). When it is long, it emits light in blue, and when it becomes short, it may be notified (by changing the emission color to red, etc.).

<Direction 2. When operating with the second and third operation patterns>
With reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, another example of the effect using the ball effect device 800 (second effect example) will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the timing change of the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 in the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the second effect example in the second operation pattern. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the timing change of the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 in the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the second effect example in the third operation pattern. be. In addition, in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the timing change of the rotating disk 840 is the same. Further, in FIGS. 31 and 32, it is illustrated that the case where the rotary disk 840 is maintained in the first receiving state and the case where the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the second receiving state can be switched. In this case, the term “maintained” is not limited to the case where the rotary disk 840 is stopped, and for example, the rotary disk 840 rotates within a short time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (less than the maintenance speed SV). (Rotates at the speed of) Includes the case of returning to the same state again.

In the example described here, in the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot A, the MPU 201 is large so that the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 operate based on the second operation pattern. In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening solenoid is driven and controlled, and the MPU 201 operates so that the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 operate based on the third operation pattern. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so that the rotary disk 840 operates based on the operation timing of the second variable winning device 650 in the second and third operation patterns (the start timing of the round game R in the tenth round). The MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 drives and controls the drive motor KM1. The description of the portion overlapping with the first operation pattern will be omitted.

The main differences between the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern from the first operation pattern are the presence / absence of short-time opening, the operation time T2 of the second variable winning device 650, and the operation of the storage plate 657. The timing, the opening order of the variable winning devices 65, 650, and the operation mode of the rotating disk 840. These will be explained in order, including these.

First, in the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the round game R in a specific round is executed with a short opening that makes it difficult to win a ball. For example, in the 10th round round game R of the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the short opening operation time TMI (maximum 0.2 seconds). After that, it is controlled to close. In the 13th round round game R of the second operation pattern, the first variable winning device 65 is similarly opened for a short time.

In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the operation time of the second variable winning device 650 is set to the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds). That is, the MPU 201 has elapsed or a specified number of round end conditions (round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T2)) in the round game R in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened (the present embodiment). Then, when the winning of 10) pachinko balls) is satisfied, the large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 651 to the closed state and close the second specified winning opening 650a, and the round game R Is finished. Since it is impossible to win a specified number of balls in the second specific winning opening 650a at the operating time T2 in consideration of the firing interval of the balls (0.6 seconds / piece at the shortest), the second operating pattern And in the third operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is closed with the lapse of the operation time T2.

In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the operation timing of the storage plate 657 is from the start timing of the round game R of the corresponding round (opening timing of the opening / closing plate 651) to the specified period TE2a (in the present embodiment). It is said that 4 seconds have passed. That is, when the specified period TE2a elapses from the start timing of the round game R of the corresponding round, the MPU 201 performs the present execution for several seconds (a sufficient time for the ball to pass) from the regulated state to the allowable state of the storage plate 657. In the mode, the solenoid for the storage plate is driven and controlled so as to switch (for 0.5 seconds) and then return to the regulated state. As a result, among the balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 650a in the round game R of the corresponding round, the balls that have come into contact with the right side of the storage plate 657 and have stagnated are guided to the communication opening 654.

In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the MPU 201 causes the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 to operate for a long time from the first round to the ninth round, while the tenth round. After that, the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is operated in the even-numbered round, and the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is operated in the odd-numbered round.

As described above, there is no difference between the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern by the 9th round, and the difference occurs after the 10th round. That is, the timing at which the ball flows into the rolling flow path portion 870 differs depending on whether the round game R in the 13th round is open for a long time or open for a short time. Focusing on this difference, the operation mode of the rotary disk 840 (particularly, the second specified time TE2b) is defined.

That is, the MPU 221 shifts the rotary disk 840 from the first receiving state to the second receiving state when a period exceeding the specified time TE2a (6 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the 10th round round game R. The drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled so as to be switched and held in the second receiving state. After that, when the second specified time TE2b (25 seconds in the present embodiment) exceeding the specified time TE2a elapses from the start of the 10th round round game R, a short time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) In the meantime, the rotating disk 840 rotates (rotates at a speed less than the maintenance speed SV) and returns to the second receiving state again.

The second specified time TE2b abuts on the storage plate 657 in the 14th round round game R when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, and then the timing at which the ball reaches the rotating disk 840 and the second. When the jackpot game is performed in the operation pattern of 3, the timing is defined as the timing between the contact with the storage plate 657 in the round game R of the 14th round and the timing at which the ball reaches the rotating disk 840.

That is, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, assuming that the round game R of the 11th round is completed in 6 seconds, the period from the start of the round game R of the 10th round to the start of the 14th round is 17 .4 seconds, 4 seconds from the start of the 14th round round game R until the storage plate 657 changes to the allowable state, and then 1 second until the ball reaches the rotating disk 840. Therefore, the timing at which the ball abuts on the storage plate 657 in the 14th round round game R and then reaches the rotating disk 840 is 22.4 seconds after the start of the 10th round round game R.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, assuming that the 11th round and the 13th round round game R are completed in 6 seconds respectively, 14 rounds are started from the start of the 10th round round game R. It takes 23.2 seconds to start the eyes, 4 seconds from the start of the 14th round round game R until the storage plate 657 changes to the allowable state, and then until the ball reaches the rotating disk 840. Is 1 second, so the ball abuts on the storage plate 657 in the 14th round round game R, and then the ball reaches the rotating disk 840 from the start of the 10th round round game R 28. It will be 2 seconds later.

As described above, in the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, due to the difference in the operation mode of the first variable winning device 65 in the 13th round, the storage plate 657 and the storage plate 657 in the round game R in the 14th round. After the contact, there is a difference in the timing at which the sphere arrives at the rotating disk 840, and during this timing, the rotating disk 840 rotates with the passage of the second specified time TE2b. With the rotation of the rotating disk 840, the spheres staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 are discharged through the second through hole KH2.

Then, MPU221 is the latest 75.2 seconds (11th round and 13th round round game) as the timing 3 seconds after the end of the 14th round round game R from the start of the 10th round round game R. When 30 seconds have passed for each, the rotating disk 840 is rotated (rotated at a speed less than the maintenance speed SV) for a short time (3 seconds in this embodiment), and the remaining balls are removed. The rotary disk 840 is driven and controlled so as to be discharged from the second through hole KH2 and returned to the first receiving state.

As described above, in the case of the second operation pattern, since a plurality of (two) balls can flow into the ball effect device 800 before the second specified time TE2b elapses, the first penetration is performed first. The ball that stayed on the front side of the hole KH1 (the ball that entered the second variable winning device 650 in the 12th round round game R) is followed by the ball (the second variable winning in the 14th round round game R). (A ball that has entered the device 650) can be made to collide, and the previously accumulated ball can be flowed to the back side of the first through hole KH1 and the ball can be detected by the detection sensor SC1 (see FIG. 24). ).

On the other hand, in the case of the third operation pattern, one ball flows into the ball effecting device 800 before the second specified time TE2b elapses (enters the second variable winning device 650 in the 12th round round game R). Since it is only a ball (ball), and the ball is discharged from the second through hole KH2 in advance after the lapse of the second specified time TE2b (see FIG. 26), the follow-up ball (the 14th round round game R is the first). The ball entered into the 2 variable winning device 650) is received by the empty second guide hole 846 and stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1. Therefore, since the sphere does not pass through the first through hole KH1, the sphere is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

In this way, by changing the operation mode of the variable winning devices 65 and 650 between the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, it is assumed that the ball is similarly fired (unleashed) and the jackpot game is performed. Also, it is possible to cause a case where the sphere passes through the detection sensor SC1 and a case where the sphere does not pass through the detection sensor SC1.

Although the state of the storage plate 657 changes in the 10th round round game R, the opening period of the opening / closing plate 651 is too short and the ball does not normally enter, so immediately after the 10th round round game R. It is unlikely that the ball will flow into the ball effect device 800. If the ball miraculously enters the second variable winning device 650 in the 10th round round game R, the ball is the rotating disk 840 while the rotating disk 840 maintains the first receiving state. As it reaches, it passes through the first through hole KH1 as it is and is detected by the detection sensor SC1. Therefore, in the 10th round game R, the motivation of the player who keeps firing the ball in order to enter the ball into the second variable winning device 650 can be improved.

Further, as another operation pattern, an operation pattern may be set in which only the opening time in the 10th round round game R is extended from the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern.

According to the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, it is difficult for the player to grasp which operation pattern is used until the 12th round round game R has elapsed. On the other hand, when a long time elapses in the 11th round round game R, even if each variable winning device 65,650a is opened in the second operation pattern, the follow-up ball (14th round round game R). The second specified time TE2b elapses before the ball entered into the second variable winning device 650) reaches the rotating disk 840, and the ball cannot be passed through the detection sensor SC1. Therefore, in the 11th round round game R, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player who keeps firing the ball in order to make the ball enter the first variable winning device 65 in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress single shots.

<Direction 3. Use of speed changes such as SV and MDV>
With reference to FIG. 33, another example (third effect example) of the effect using the ball effect device 800 will be described. 33 (a) and 33 (b) are views showing an example of the timing change of the ball staging device 800. In FIG. 33 (a), after the storage plate 657 is in the allowable state, the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1 within the specified time TE3a, but in FIG. 33 (b), the storage plate 657 is in the allowable state. The case where the passage of the sphere is not detected by the detection sensor SC1 within the specified period TE3a is shown in the figure. Here, the specified time TE3a is set to a time sufficient for the sphere to be guided to any of the guide holes 845 and 846 (3 seconds in this production example) in the first operation of the rotary disk 840.

In the third production example, the numerical values of the corresponding counters C1 and C2 are added (1 is added) due to the ball passing through the detection sensors SC1 and SC2, and the jackpot game is started. Along with this, the numerical values of the counters C1 and C2 are cleared (C1, C2 = 0). Further, in the embodiment described in the third production example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 perform the opening / closing operation in the above-mentioned first operation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. Illustration is omitted.

In the third effect example, the MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor KN1 in a mode in which the rotary disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 is rotated in the first operation when the jackpot game starts. The first operation of the rotary disk 840 in the third production example will be described.

The first operation of the rotating disk 840 is that the rotating disk 840 is normally rotated in the rotation direction CW at a maintenance speed SV (a speed of half rotation in one second), and is in the first receiving state or the second receiving state. In addition, it is an operation of temporarily stopping the ball for a sufficient time (1 second in this production example) for the ball to pass through the rotating disk 840. That is, it is a 4-second cycle operation in which a rotation operation and a pause are alternately repeated every second.

The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor KM1 so as to change the operating speed of the rotary disk 840 due to the frame button 22 being operated by the player during the period of the first round game R. For example, an embodiment in which the drive motor KM1 is stopped, decelerated, or accelerated while the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, or for several seconds due to one pressing of the frame button 22. Drive control is performed with. After that, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the rotary disk 840 is rotated at the maintenance speed SV again.

Since the MPU 221 changes the operating speed of the drive motor KM1 due to the operation of the frame button 22, the rotating disk 840 when the same time has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game after the first round round game R. The state changes depending on the operation mode of the frame button 22 during the period of the first round game R.

As shown in FIG. 33A, in the third production example, the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 and the second specific winning opening 650a are set from the start of the first round game R. The storage plate 657 is switched to the allowable state at the timing when 32 seconds, which is a longer time than the total time (less than 1 second) required for the passed ball to reach the storage plate 657, has elapsed. When it is detected that the sphere has passed through the detection sensor SC1 (the value of the counter C1 becomes 1) by the time when the specified time TE3a elapses after the storage plate 657 is switched to the allowable state, the MPU 221 is a rotating circle. The drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled in a mode in which the plate 840 is rotated in the second operation, and notifications related to the interests of the player are performed.

The device that performs this notification is not limited. For example, it may be performed by the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, or the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the numerical value of the counter C1 immediately after the rotary disk 840 is in the first receiving state (immediately after the detection unit SGb is detected by the angle detection sensor KSC1) becomes 1 instead of the passage of the specified time TE3a. It may be determined whether or not.

The second operation of the rotary disk 840 differs from the first operation only in that the speed during the rotation operation is the discharge speed MDV. By rotating the rotary disk 840 in the second motion, the ball that has reached the rotary disk 840 subsequently passes through the first through hole KH1 via the first guide hole 845 and passes through the detection sensor SC1. By doing so, the value of the counter C1 is added, or the value of the counter C2 is added by passing through the second through hole KH2 via the second guide hole 846 and passing through the detection sensor SC2. ..

Then, after the total of the numerical values of the counters C1 and C2 becomes 2, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the rotating disk 840 is set to the first receiving state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), it is not detected that the ball has passed through the detection sensor SC1 by the time when the specified time TE3a elapses after the storage plate 657 is switched to the allowable state (the numerical value of the counter C1 is: In the case of (remaining 0), it is determined that the sphere has entered the second guide hole 846 and is staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1, and the MPU221 maintains the drive mode of the drive motor KM1 and the first 3 An input suggestion effect is performed by a notification means such as a symbol display device 81.

The input suggestion effect is composed of an explanatory effect of the input method and an instruction effect that occurs periodically (every time the rotating disk 840 is in the first receiving state). In the explanatory staging, the player is instructed to operate using the frame button 22 after that, and the player is informed that the operation is successful according to the instruction content, which is advantageous for the player. Will be done. It should be noted that this advantageous mode of notification is not limited in any way. For example, notification of whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state (notification that it is a latent probable change) or notification of round promotion may be used.

In the instruction effect, an operation method such as "press and hold the right side of the frame button 22" and "press the upper button of the frame button 22 repeatedly" is instructed. When the MPU221 determines that the operation as instructed is performed, the MPU221 maintains the driving mode of the driving motor KM1. Therefore, by continuing to perform the operation as instructed, the ball can be continuously retained on the front side of the first through hole KH1, so that the second ball is placed on the rotating disk 840 after the 10th round game R. When the ball arrives, whether the ball enters the first guide hole 845 or the second guide hole 846, the ball will pass through the detection sensor SC1 and the MPU221 will notify the player's interests. Can be executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the MPU 221 that the operation as instructed has not been performed, the MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor KM1 in a mode in which the rotary disk 840 is rotated in the second operation, and the third symbol display device 81. An effect indicating that the operation according to the instruction content has failed is executed, and the subsequent instruction effect is omitted.

When the rotating disk 840 rotates in the second operation, the sphere staying in the second guide hole 846 flows down through the second through hole KH2 and is detected by the detection sensor SC2. As a result, the numerical value of the counter C2 is added.

After that, similarly, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the rotary disk 840 is in the first receiving state because the total of the numerical values of the counters C1 and C2 becomes 2.

As described above, according to the third effect example, after the input suggestion effect is generated, it is better to operate the frame button 22 according to the instruction effect to increase the possibility that the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1. Therefore, the player's attention can be directed to grasping the operation method and executing the operation. Therefore, in the jackpot game, compared to the case where only the firing of the ball and the processing of the payout ball are chased, the player's mind is distracted to the operation of the frame button 22, and the player gives a special hitting method (single hitting, etc.). You can take away the room to do it. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game.

<Direction 4. Directing across jackpots ＞
With reference to FIG. 34, another example of the effect using the ball effect device 800 (fourth effect example) will be described. In the fourth effect example, a case where it can be determined that a big hit is continuously obtained in a short time by passing the ball through the detection sensor SC1 before the 10th round game R will be described. In this case, it is possible to determine that the jackpot has occurred continuously in a short time independently of the MPU 201 of the main control device.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the time change of the storage plate 657 and the time change of the ball effect device 800 with respect to the jackpot game. In the fourth production example, regardless of the jackpot type, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a open and close in the first operation pattern, while the operation timing of the storage plate 657 is the third production example. The timing is the same as described above.

In the fourth production example, the MPU 221 holds the rotating disk 840 in the second receiving state for 150 seconds, and then rotates at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV at the rotation operation time point RP that visits every 150 seconds, and then again the second. The drive motor KN1 is driven and controlled in a manner of repeating returning to the receiving state. That is, when a sphere is retained in the second guide hole 846 of the rotating disk 840 on the front side of the first through hole KH1, the sphere passes through the second through hole KH2 by the rotation of the rotating disk 840. It passes through the detection sensor SC2 and is discharged from the ball effect device 800.

In the fourth effect example, the rotary disk 840 does not pause in the first receiving state, and the event that the ball passes through the first through hole KH1 through the first guide hole 845 is prevented from occurring. .. Therefore, the event that the ball passes through the first through hole KH1 occurs mainly when the ball staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 is pushed by the trailing ball (see FIG. 24).

Here, as shown in FIG. 34, when the rotary disk 840 becomes the rotation operation time point RP 10 seconds before the operation time TSa calculated from the start timing of the 10th round round game R elapses, the rotary disk rotates. About 140 seconds elapse before the 840 rotates next time. For example, even if about 10 seconds have passed in each round game R from the 11th round, the nth big hit game ends in about 73 seconds after that, so even after the nth big hit game ends, the first through hole KH1 The state in which the ball stays on the front side of is continued.

After the end of the nth jackpot game, the game will be played to receive a lottery to win the n + 1th jackpot, but if the interval until the n + 1th jackpot is won is short, the rotating disk 840 is next. The operation time TSa calculated from the start timing of the first round round game R in the n + 1th big hit game may elapse before the rotation in the rotation operation time point RP.

For example, according to the example shown in FIG. 34, it is assumed that the round game R of each round progresses in about 10 seconds, and the time from the start of the 10th round of the jackpot game R of the nth jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. The sum of (83 seconds) and the time (10 seconds) until the start of the first round of the jackpot game R of the n + 1th jackpot game is the time until the next rotating disk 840 rotates 140. This is a case where a big hit is obtained during the lottery specified time TE4a (47 seconds), which is the time subtracted from the seconds.

Assuming that it takes about 3 seconds for one variation display, according to the example shown in FIG. 34, the variation display can be executed about 15 times during the lottery specified time TE4a. That is, it is possible to include the case where the n + 1th big hit is obtained by the lottery of the number of times when the maximum number of reserved balls (4 pieces) of the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 is exceeded.

In this case, when the n + 1th jackpot game is started, the ball restricted to the storage plate 657 in the first round game R while the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the second receiving state is the storage plate. Due to the change to the allowable state of 657, it flows down toward the rotating disk 840. The flowing ball pushes the ball (the ball that has stayed from the nth big hit game) that had previously stayed on the front side of the first through hole KH1 and passes through the first through hole KH1 to detect the sensor. It passes through SC1 and is discharged from the ball effect device 800.

On the other hand, if the jackpot cannot be obtained during the lottery specified time TE4a, the ball regulated by the storage plate 657 in the first round game R is changed to the allowable state of the storage plate 657, and the rotation circle is formed. The rotating disk 840 is rotated before flowing down toward the plate 840, and the ball accumulated on the front side of the first through hole KH1 is discharged. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down toward the rotating disk 840 newly stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1 and does not pass through the detection sensor SC1.

That is, in the fourth effect example, the lottery specified time TE4a is defined by the progress degree of the nth big hit game and the operation cycle of the ball effect device 800, and the lottery specified time TE4a is defined from the end of the nth big hit game. By acquiring the n + 1th jackpot before the lapse of time, the ball can be passed through the detection sensor SC1 a few seconds after the storage plate 657 is allowed to be in the allowable state in the first round game R.

In other words, a few seconds after the storage plate 657 was allowed to be in the allowable state in the first round game R, the detection sensor SC1 detected the passage of the ball, and the MPU221 was told that a continuous jackpot occurred at short intervals. It can be determined (it can be determined regardless of the signal of MPU201). As a result, when determining the occurrence of a jackpot in a short time based on the signal from MPU201 (for example, the number and period of fluctuations until the nth jackpot is acquired and the n + 1th jackpot are acquired are stored. The control flow can be shortened as compared with (when determining the number and period of fluctuations when the n + 1th jackpot occurs).

In the fourth effect example, when the detection sensor SC1 detects the passage of the ball a few seconds after the storage plate 657 is allowed to be in the allowable state in the first round game R, the MPU 221 is used a plurality of times in a short time. A continuous jackpot notification effect is performed to notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The mode of the continuous jackpot notification effect is not limited at all. For example, it may be a notification that generates an electronic sound that does not normally flow, a notification that causes a rainbow-colored light emission by an LED, or an effect of displaying the characters "Congratulations" on at least a part of the third symbol display device 81. But it's okay.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the second guide hole 846 retains the sphere when one sphere arrives, and allows the sphere to pass through the first through hole KH1 when an additional second sphere arrives. The case where the shape is used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when passing spheres through the first through hole KH1, it may be a condition that three or more spheres stay. As a result, the frequency of passing the sphere through the first through hole KH1 can be reduced, so that the rarity value of the effect output based on the passage of the detection sensor SC1 can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the back surface side of the shielding plate portion 851 is composed of a smooth shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a low-repulsion member such as a rubber plate member is attached to the back side of the shielding plate portion 851, and when a ball staying in the second guide hole 846 is pushed out to the front side, the low-repulsion member is used. You may make it collide. In this case, it is possible to reduce the momentum (velocity) of the ball pushed out to the front side by the inclined plate portion 841f2 to bounce back to the back side. Therefore, the magnitude of the maintenance speed SV can be reduced.

Further, instead of the low-repulsion member, a groove may be formed which is configured to change the momentum (velocity) when the ball colliding with the ball rebounds due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating disk 840. In this case, due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating disk 840, the ball repels vigorously and easily passes through the second through hole KH2, and the repulsion of the ball is weak and it is difficult to pass through the second through hole KH2. Can be configured.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front cover 851 is made of a light-transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the front cover 851 may be configured in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize the back side from the front side because the light is not transmitted or the degree of the transmitted light is low. In this case, after the rotating disk 840 is guided to the second guide hole 846 in the second receiving state, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled so as to be in the receiving prevention state, thereby guiding the second guide. The ball staying in the hole 846 can be hidden by the front cover 851. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to know which of the guide holes 845 and 846 of the rotating disk 840 the first ball has entered.

In the first embodiment, the case where a part of the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is guided to the ball staging device 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, one of the balls that has passed through any of the first variable winning device 65, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the general winning opening 63, the normal entry opening (through gate) 67, or the out opening 661. The unit may be guided to the ball effect device 800, or a passage (so-called “warp”) that guides the ball from the left side of the center frame 86 to the upper position of the first ball entry port 64 through the lower part of the center frame. A part of the ball that has passed through the ball may be guided to the ball staging device 800, or a ball passing opening that is different from the winning opening and through which the ball can pass is arranged in the game board 13, and the ball passing opening is provided. A part of the ball that has passed through the ball may be guided to the ball effect device 800.

For example, when all the balls that have passed through the first ball entry port 64 are guided to the ball effect device 800, the second guide hole 846 is opened at 5 second intervals while maintaining the second receiving state of the rotating disk 840. 2 The drive motor KM1 is driven by arranging it on the front side of the through hole KH2 and discharging the ball staying in the second guide hole 846 (the speed at which the rotary disk 840 rotates at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV). In this case, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection sensor SC1, it can be determined that the ball has passed through the first ball entry port 64 continuously at intervals of less than 5 seconds. Therefore, by performing a specific effect based on the passage of the ball through the detection sensor SC1 and controlling the player to notify the player, the player frequently receives the notification and the ball passes through the first entry port 64. You can easily grasp what you are doing.

In the first embodiment, the case where the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened is sandwiched between the rounds in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened and the round game R is performed has been described. Not limited. For example, the second variable winning device 650 may be opened and the rounds in which the round game R is performed may be arranged continuously (adjacent), or in one big hit game, the second variable winning device 650 may be opened and the round may be performed. The round in which the game R is performed may be configured only once.

In the first embodiment, the case where the second variable winning device 650 is opened and the round in which the round game R is performed is arranged immediately after the start of the big hit game and near the end of the big hit game has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, it may be placed in the middle of the jackpot game.

In the first embodiment, the case where the storage plate 657 is in the allowable state when a certain period of time has elapsed after the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the storage plate 657 may be in the allowable state when a certain period of time has elapsed after the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is closed.

Further, the storage plate 657 may be allowed at the timing when the ball is not detected in the second specific winning opening 650a in the state where the ball is not arranged between the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage plate 657. .. In this case, in comparison with the period required for the ball passing through the second specific winning opening 650a to reach the storage plate 657, the ball is in the period until the storage plate 657 is closed (for example, 0.5 seconds). It does not reach the storage plate 657. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from accidentally passing through the storage plate 657 in the allowable state.

In the first embodiment, when the sphere P11 stays in the second guide hole 846 and the sphere P12 collides with the sphere P11 from the front side thereof, the sphere P11 is discharged to the back side of the rotating disk 840 and the sphere P12. Has described the case where it remains inside the rotating disk 840, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as the sphere P11 is discharged to the back surface side of the rotating disk 840, the sphere P12 may also be discharged from the rotating disk 840. In this case, since the ball P12 can be prevented from being pushed by the ball supplied thereafter and passing through the first through hole KH1, a collision of the balls occurs every time the storage plate 657 is in an allowable state. , It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down through the first through hole KH1.

In the first production example of the first embodiment, the case where the line of sight of the player is guided to the first variable winning device 65 in the second and subsequent round game R has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, during the round game R in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that "attention should be paid to the central rotating body", or the LED arranged on the substrate 862. May be made to emit light to guide the player's line of sight to the rotating disk 840. This makes it difficult for the player to know how many balls have entered the first variable winning device 65, and the accuracy of single-shot hitting (the round game R is completed in a short time while performing single-shot hitting). Accuracy) can be lowered.

In the first production example of the first embodiment, the operation timing of the rotary disk 840 is set to the time expected to be required for the round game R when the jackpot game is advanced by leaving it untouched, and the special hit such as a single hit. Although it is specified by comparison with the time expected to be required for the round game R when the jackpot game is advanced while being performed, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate period, which is an intermediate period that is neither short nor long required for the round game R, is set, and after the intermediate period elapses, a notification is given to guide the ball to the rotating disk 840 for a certain period. (For example, "Keep this round for how many seconds", etc.), the rotating disk 840 is operated in such a manner that the sphere can pass through the detection sensor SC1 by guiding the sphere to the rotating disk 840 for a certain period of time. You may let me. In this case, the jackpot game can be executed while allowing the player to consider the period for advancing the round game R (how to launch the ball). In this case, since the period required for the jackpot game can be consciously lengthened, the speed of paying out the prize balls can be reduced.

In the first effect example of the first embodiment, the case where the rotating disk 840 rotates in one way in the rotation direction CW has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, for a predetermined period, the rotary disk 840 is maintained in the second receiving state, and during operation, the second guide hole 846 is single on the front side of the first through hole KH1 and the front side of the second through hole KH2. The rotary disk 840 may be temporarily stopped when the second guide hole 846 reaches the front side of the second through hole KH2 at the shortest time interval of the round game R. ). As a result, the spheres staying in the second guide hole 846 flow down through the second through hole KH2 before the plurality of spheres gather in the second guide hole 846, and are discharged from the rotary disk 840. It is possible to prevent detection by the detection sensor SC1.

In the first effect example of the first embodiment, the case where the rotary disk 840 maintains the second receiving state from the lapse of the operating time TSS to the lapse of the specified time TEc has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the drive motor KM1 is driven in a manner in which the first operation (rotational speed is the operation of the maintenance speed SV) described in the third production example is repeated from the lapse of the operation time TSS to the lapse of the specified time TEc. You may control it. In this case, among the balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650a in the 10th round round game R before the lapse of the specified time TEc, the ball that comes into contact with the storage plate 657 and is guided to the ball effecting device 800. , The case of being guided by the first guide hole 845 and the case of being guided by the second guide hole 846 can occur. Before the lapse of the specified time TEc, the sphere will pass through the detection sensor SC1 regardless of which of the guide holes 845 and 846 is guided. Since it is difficult to distinguish it from the rotational movement of the rotating disk 840 during the lapse of time, the player's attention to the ball effect device 800 in terms of whether or not the ball flows down to the detection sensor SC1 near the specified time TEc. Can be improved.

In the first effect example of the first embodiment, the case where the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 is maintained in the second receiving state after the lapse of the operating time TSS has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the receiving prevention state by rotating about 60 degrees from the second receiving state to the front view clockwise from the start of the first round game R until the operating time TSa elapses, and the operating time is maintained. The drive may be controlled so that the rotary disk 840 rotates after a sufficient time has elapsed from the passage of the TSa to reach the rotary disk 840, and the ball is in the second receiving state. In this case, the sphere that has reached the rotary disk 840 can be brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion 841a to reduce the speed in the front-rear direction and then guided to the second guide hole 846, so that the ball can be directed toward the rotary disk 840. To prevent the ball from accidentally passing through the first through hole KH1 with the momentum when the speed in the front-rear direction of the ball unexpectedly increases while flowing down the rolling flow path portion 870. Can be done.

Further, by rotating the rotating disk 840 in a state where the sphere is in contact with the plate-shaped portion 841a, the rubbing friction between the sphere staying on the front side of the rotating disk 840 and the plate-shaped portion 841a causes. Since the sphere can be moved left and right, it is possible to improve the attention to the sphere that has reached the rotating disk 840.

This also applies to the 10th round round game R. That is, after the first ball is guided to the second guide hole 846, the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the receiving prevention state again, and the specified time TEc has elapsed from the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). The drive motor KM1 may be driven and controlled so that the rotary disk 840 is rotated at the same time, the rotary disk 840 is temporarily stopped in the second receiving state, and then the rotary disk 840 is rotated once. In this case, if the second ball is made to flow down toward the rotating disk 840 in the 10th round round game R before the lapse of the specified time TEc, the ball abuts on the plate-shaped portion 841a and is a rotating circle. As the rotating disk 840 stays on the front side of the plate 840 and becomes the second receiving state, it is guided to the second guide hole 846, and the first ball is pushed out to the second ball, and the first ball is pushed out. It passes through the through hole KH1 and is detected by the detection sensor SC1.

Further, the rotating disk 840 may be maintained in the receiving prevention state from the lapse of the specified time TEc until the rotating disk 840 is rotationally driven after the start of the 15th round round game R. As a result, when the second ball is flowed down toward the rotating disk 840 in the 10th round round game R after the lapse of the specified time TEc, the surplus ball mistakenly passes through the first through hole KH1. Can be prevented from doing so.

By controlling the drive motor KM1 so that the sphere is once brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion 841a of the rotary disk 840 and the sphere is retained on the front side of the rotary disk 840, the rotary disk 840 is formed. It is possible to configure an effect that draws attention to the direction of rotation. For example, when the first receiving state is configured by rotationally driving clockwise, while the receiving prevention state is configured as the situation constituting the second receiving state by rotating counterclockwise, the receiving state is configured. It is more profitable for the player to rotate the rotating disk 840 clockwise after the ball comes into contact with the plate-shaped portion 841a in the prevented state (even if the ball does not stay in the second guide hole 846, the ball is not retained in the second guide hole 846. Can be passed through the detection sensor SC1). Therefore, by performing such notification, the attention of the rotating disk 840 can be improved. Further, when the ball is staying in the second guide hole 846, the ball can be passed through the detection sensor SC1 regardless of the rotation direction, so that the player's sense of security can be improved.

In the first effect example of the first embodiment, the driving mode of the ball effect device 800 is advantageous for the player by causing the second ball to reach the rotating disk 840 before the predetermined time TEc elapses. Although the case of generating the notification has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time from the start of the jackpot game is measured without using the ball effect device 800, and the jackpot game is specified by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 100 seconds, 200 seconds, etc.) elapses from the start of the jackpot game. It may be determined whether or not the round is completed, and if it is determined that a specific round of the jackpot game is completed by the lapse of a predetermined time, the player may be controlled to be notified in an advantageous manner. In this case, regardless of the arrangement of the ball staging device 800, a display staging (countdown display or the like) related to a predetermined time can be performed at an arbitrary position, so that the degree of freedom of staging can be improved. In addition, the display effect can be used to incite the player (accelerate the progress of the jackpot game), and it is possible to easily deprive the player of the margin for stopping the interval.

In the first production example of the first embodiment, the presence or absence of a single shot is determined from the length of the period required for the jackpot game, and a case where it is easier for the player to generate an advantageous notification if the single shot is not performed will be described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the presence or absence of a single shot may be determined from a numerical value obtained by subtracting the number of balls that have passed through the specific winning openings 65a and 650a from the number of balls fired in the jackpot game. In the first operation pattern described together with the first production example, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set to 2 seconds. From 6 seconds / piece), at least one or two balls should flow down without being guided to the specific winning openings 65a and 650a and pass through the out opening 661. Therefore, in the case of a 15-round jackpot game, about 14 to 28 balls will pass through the out opening 661.

Therefore, when the numerical value obtained by subtracting the number of balls that have passed through the specific winning openings 65a and 650a from the number of shot balls is smaller than the number of about 14 to 28 (for example, less than 14), the player It is determined that a single shot is being made, and control is performed so that the player is not notified in a favorable manner. On the other hand, if the values are the same (for example, 14 or more), it is determined that the single shot is not performed. , May be controlled so as to give an advantageous notification to the player.

Further, it is detected that the ball has passed through the out port 661 at a timing delayed from the interval between rounds by the time from when the ball has passed through the first variable winning device 65 to when it is detected that the ball has passed through the out port 661. If this is the case, it is determined that the interval is not stopped, and the player is notified in an advantageous manner. On the other hand, if it is not detected that the ball has passed through the out port 661 at the same timing, the interval is set. It may be determined that the stop is being performed, and the player may be controlled so as not to give an advantageous notification to the player.

The position for detecting the passage of the ball is not limited to the out port 661. For example, the detection sensor may be arranged at a position formed by a single passage on the downstream side of the return rubber 69. This detection sensor detects all balls fired by hitting right. The presence or absence of interval pause can be determined by the relationship between the output from the detection sensor and the timing of the opening / closing operation of the variable winning devices 65 and 650.

That is, when the jackpot game is played unattended, the output of this detection sensor is always composed of a waveform having the same interval as the ball firing interval (minimum 0.6 seconds / piece) specified for each gaming machine. Will be done. On the other hand, when the game is played aiming at the interval stop, the output of the detection sensor is wider than the firing interval of the ball before the closing timing of the variable winning devices 65 and 650 is reached. Therefore, if the variable winning devices 65 and 650 are closed within a predetermined period after the interval of the output waveform of the detection sensor is widened as compared with the firing interval of the sphere, it is determined that the interval interval is stopped. Can be done.

In the third effect example of the first embodiment, the operating speed of the rotating disk 840 changes when the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1 or the player fails to operate the frame button 22 as instructed. The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the mode of change in the operating speed may be defined by the jackpot type of the special symbol. For example, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (probability variation jackpot), the drive motor KN1 is driven and controlled so that the operating speed of the rotary disk 840 is maintained at the maintenance speed SV. Thereby, regardless of whether the first ball is guided by the first guide hole 845 or the second guide hole 845, the detection sensor SC1 can pass the ball.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (normal jackpot), the part that stops in the first receiving state is omitted from the operation mode of the rotating disk 840 in the first production example, and the ball is guided in the first receiving state. The drive motor KN1 is driven and controlled so that the operating speed of the rotary disk 840 is initially set to the maintenance speed SV and changes to less than the maintenance speed SV from the middle. As a result, the ball guided by the rotating disk 840 can flow down through the second through hole KH2 without exception. As a result, the player's concentration can be directed to whether or not the ball is ejected from the second through hole KH2, so that special hits such as single hits can be suppressed.

Further, the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 in the round game R after the round may be changed depending on the length of time spent on the round game R. For example, when it is determined that the round game R takes more time than necessary (for example, 30 seconds which is the maximum time of the operating time T1), it is determined that a single hit is performed, and the first receiving state is used. The drive motor KM1 may be driven and controlled so that the rotation speed of the rotating disk 840 is less than the maintenance speed SV while preventing the sphere from being guided. The length of time to be determined may be the length of time spanning a plurality of rounds.

In the third effect example of the first embodiment, when it is determined by the MPU 221 that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect is performed, the case where the rotary disk 840 rotates at the maintenance speed SV has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when it is determined by the MPU 221 that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect is performed, the rotating disk 840 may be rotated half a turn in the opposite direction (counterclockwise). In this case, since the second guide hole 846 is not arranged on the front side of the second through hole KH2, the ball can be continuously retained in the second guide hole 846 regardless of the operating speed of the rotating disk 840.

In the third effect example of the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating disk 840 is maintained as long as it is continuously determined by the MPU 221 that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect is performed, and the operation is performed as instructed even once. Although it has been described that the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 becomes less than the maintenance speed SV when it is determined by the MPU 221 that the failure has occurred, the ball staying in the second guide hole 846 is discharged through the second through hole KH2. It is not limited to this. For example, the operating speed of the rotating disk 840 may be maintained even if the operation fails up to once, and the operating speed of the rotating disk 840 may be lower than the maintenance speed if the operation fails twice, or continuously. It is also possible that the operating speed of the rotating disk 840 is set to be less than the maintenance speed SV for the first time when the operation fails a plurality of times. In this case, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage from becoming excessively large for the player who is unfamiliar with the operation, or to interweave an operation mode that is almost impossible in the instruction staging to improve the attention to the instruction staging. Can be done.

Further, the rotation speed of the rotating disk 840 is determined according to the number of times that the MPU221 determines that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect is performed and the number of times that the MPU221 determines that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect fails. May be stepwise switched to a plurality of speeds equal to or higher than the maintenance speed SV. In this case, when the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 is several steps higher than the maintenance speed SV, the player maintains the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 even if the instruction effect is ignored several times. Since it can be kept above SV, it is possible to concentrate on launching the ball toward the variable winning devices 65 and 650. In this way, if the rotary disk 840 can be ignored when the rotary disk 840 becomes high speed to some extent, the player will pay attention to the rotary disk 840 in an attempt to grasp the rotational speed of the rotary disk 840. The attention of the rotating disk 840 can be improved.

In addition, when the failure of the operation is allowed by the time when the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 is less than the maintenance speed SV, the player fails to perform the operation as instructed. The MPU 221 may be used to execute a re-instruction effect that directs the operation as instructed. Further, this re-instruction effect may be a stronger effect (for example, stronger light emission, louder volume) than the previous instruction effect. In this case, when the player fails to operate without noticing the instruction effect, it is possible to notice that the operation instruction is given by the re-instruction effect.

The instruction effect or the re-instruction effect may be an effect corresponding to the firing intensity of the ball. In this case, it is possible to give an instruction related to the profit directly given to the player such as a prize ball by the bullet game, and the player can secure the maximum profit by following the instruction.

In the fourth effect example of the first embodiment, the lottery specified time TE4a is defined by the relationship between the progress of the nth jackpot game and the rotation cycle of the rotation disk 840 of the ball effect device 800. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, a different period is newly defined depending on the jackpot type as the period from the end of the jackpot game to the next rotation operation of the rotating disk 840, and the player is notified of the lottery specified time TE4a based on the defined period. It may be a thing. As a result, the lottery specified time TE4a, which differs depending on the jackpot type, can be secured for a certain period, so that it is possible to prevent the lottery specified period TE4a from becoming extremely short. In addition, the new regulation of the period until the rotary disk 840 rotates is executed only when there is a possibility that the lottery regulation period TE4a becomes extremely short, and in other cases, it is the same as the fourth production example. The rotary disk 840 may rotate in the drive mode.

In the fourth effect example of the first embodiment, the case where the number of lottery required to obtain the n + 1th jackpot is smaller makes it easier for the detection sensor SC1 to pass the ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, even if the ball staging device 800 is adopted for a gaming machine in which the number of lottery required to obtain the n + 1th jackpot is fixed (for example, it is fixed at one time and there is no difference). good. In this case, if the number of rounds of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened only in the first round game R (as the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the other rounds). It may be controlled so as to be able to. In this case, as the number of rounds of the nth jackpot game is smaller, the timing of the n + 1th jackpot game arrives earlier, so that it becomes easier for the detection sensor SC1 to pass the ball. That is, the jackpot type of the nth jackpot with a small number of rounds of the jackpot game is detected as compared with the case where the jackpot type of the nth jackpot is a jackpot type with a large number of rounds of the jackpot game. Since the ball can be easily passed through the sensor SC1, it is possible to easily generate a notification that is output based on the passage and is beneficial to the player.

In the fourth effect example of the first embodiment, the lottery specified time TE4a is defined from the driving mode of the ball effect device 800, and the player wins the next big hit before the lottery specified time TE4a elapses. Although the case where the notification that is advantageous to the above is generated has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, did the time from the end of the jackpot game be measured without using the ball effect device 800, and the jackpot was obtained by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 50 seconds, 100 seconds, etc.) elapses from the end of the jackpot game? Whether or not it may be determined by the MPU 201 or MPU 221 may be controlled so that the player is notified in an advantageous manner when it is determined that the jackpot has been won by the lapse of a predetermined time. In this case, regardless of the arrangement of the ball staging device 800, a display staging (countdown display or the like) related to a predetermined time can be performed at an arbitrary position, so that the degree of freedom of staging can be improved. In addition, by inciting the player with the display effect (accelerating the progress of the game), the ball can be continuously fired and the frequency of lottery can be increased, so the expected value of winning a big hit in a certain time is raised. be able to.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<A storage unit that sends a ball to the detection port when the ball arrives with the ball placed>
By arranging a guide means through which the ball can pass, a movable means having a first receiving portion that can accept and displace the ball that has passed through the guiding means, and the first receiving portion at a predetermined position. A gaming machine A1 comprising: a passing means through which a ball can pass through the first receiving portion, and a detecting means for detecting a ball passing through the passing means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that detect that a ball has passed through a detection means and give a certain benefit to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122). However, since the conventional gaming machine described above does not have a function of grasping the situation on the upstream side of the detection means, the flow mode of the ball on the upstream side of the detection means (arrangement of balls, flow speed, flow direction, flow frequency). ), There was a problem that it was difficult to output the production.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is determined that the ball has passed through the passing means with the first receiving portion arranged at a predetermined position by detecting that the ball has passed through the detecting means. can do. That is, the situation on the upstream side of the detection means can be grasped. Therefore, by controlling so as to perform a specific effect when the sphere passes through the detection means, it is possible to easily output an effect corresponding to the flow mode of the sphere on the upstream side of the detection means.

The mode of certain profits is not limited in any way. For example, the prize ball may be paid out to the player, a big hit lottery may be performed, or a specific effect may be performed.

In the gaming machine A1, the passing means allows the passing of balls by collecting a predetermined number or more of balls in the first receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, it is possible to determine that a predetermined number or more of the balls have gathered in the first receiving portion by detecting the passage of the balls by the detecting means. For example, when the ball is ejected from the first receiving portion at regular intervals, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the frequency with which the ball is accepted by the first receiving portion.

In the gaming machine A2, the movable means can receive a ball that has passed through the guiding means, and the first receiving portion receives a second receiving portion that is different from the first receiving portion and a ball that has passed through the guiding means. The second receiving unit includes a switching unit for switching between accepting and accepting by the second receiving unit, and the second receiving unit allows the ball to pass through the passing means through the second receiving unit. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the number of balls received by the unit is set to be different from that of the first receiving unit.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the frequency at which the ball passes through the guiding means, which is necessary for passing the detecting means, can be changed by the switching unit.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the first receiving portion is displaceable in the first or second aspect, and the first receiving portion is displaced in the first aspect, whereby the ball is passed through the first receiving portion. The receiving frequency of the ball required to pass the ball through the passing means is maintained at a predetermined frequency, and the first receiving portion is displaced in the second aspect, so that the ball passes through the first receiving portion to the passing means. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the acceptance frequency of balls required for the displacement is lowered as compared with the predetermined frequency.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the ball required for the ball to pass through the passing means through the first receiving portion by changing the displacement mode of the first receiving portion. The frequency of acceptance can be changed. Therefore, while the effect generated by the ball passing through the detection means is the same, the frequency of receiving the ball required for the ball to pass through the detection means can be changed, so that the difference in the experience value of the player and the difference in the experience value of the player can be changed. , It is possible to easily cope with the difference in the gaming state.

The opportunity to change the displacement of the first receiving portion is not limited at all. For example, the player may operate the operation buttons to change the setting to change the displacement mode, or if the situation changes automatically as the game progresses, such as the game state or the distribution of the jackpot game. It may be a displacement.

Further, the difference between the first aspect and the second aspect is not limited in any way. For example, the operating speed may change, the operating direction may change, or the operating timing may change.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, after the balls pass through the passing means through the first receiving portion, the predetermined number of balls are the first receiving portion while the arrangement of the first receiving portion is maintained. A gaming machine A5 characterized by remaining in.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, when the balls are received by the first receiving portion, even if the receiving interval of the balls does not change, a predetermined number of balls are used. It is possible to shorten the interval at which the ball passes through the detection means after gathering than before gathering at the first receiving portion. Therefore, after the sphere begins to pass through the detection means, the effect generated by the sphere passing through the detection means can be frequently generated.

In the gaming machine A5, the ball passing through the passing means through the first receiving portion is the ball previously collected in the first receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the balls can be replaced inside the first receiving portion, and the detecting means can be passed in order. As a result, by arranging an object other than the spheres in the first receiving portion, it is possible to prevent fraudulent misidentification as if a predetermined number or more of spheres were arranged.

In the gaming machine A6, the first receiving portion forms a state in which the predetermined number of balls previously received is arranged so that the balls can easily pass through the passing means when the balls are next received. A gaming machine A7 characterized by having a passage preparation unit.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, when a predetermined number or more of balls are received, the balls can smoothly pass through the passing means.

In the gaming machine A7, the passage preparation unit is filled with the previously accepted ball, and when the next accepted ball is guided to the passage preparation unit, a load applied to the previously accepted ball occurs. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the previously accepted ball is guided to the passing means by the load.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, it is possible to prevent the previously accepted ball from being guided to the passing means before the next ball is accepted.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a first state in which the ball passing through the guiding means is stopped on the upstream side of the first receiving portion and a second state in which the ball is allowed to flow down to the first receiving portion are defined. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being provided with a state changing means to be formed.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the flow of the ball to the first receiving portion can be started at a timing different from the timing when the ball passes through the guiding means. ..

<Produce that special games are continuous in a short period of time>
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a predetermined lottery result. Can be changed from a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter in a privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game based on the display of, and an open state in which the game ball is easily entered in the privileged game executed by the privileged game execution means. A gaming machine comprising various variable winning means, characterized in that it is provided with a multi-type effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects based on differences in game modes related to the privileged game. B1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that pay out a large number of prize balls by a privileged game executed by showing a predetermined lottery result on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if the execution interval and the execution period of the privilege games are different, there is no difference in the production. Therefore, for example, a rare event occurs in which the privilege games occur continuously at short intervals. Even in this case, there is a problem that the rarity cannot be expressed except for the degree of payout of the prize ball, and the player's feeling of exhilaration cannot be sufficiently raised.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the multi-type effect executing means executes a plurality of types of effects based on the difference in the game mode related to the privilege game. Therefore, for example, the privilege games are continuously performed at short intervals. When it occurs, it can be set to execute a dedicated effect according to the situation, and the effect can improve the uplifting feeling of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the uplifting feeling of the player in terms other than the degree of payout of the prize balls.

It should be noted that the difference in the game mode related to the privilege game is not limited at all. For example, the period for maintaining the open state of the variable winning means due to the difference in the frequency of winning the ball to the variable winning means in the privilege game may be different, or the next privilege game is executed again after the privilege game is completed. It may be a difference in the period until it is done.

In the game machine B1, the multi-type effect executing means is a game when the number of game balls launched in the privilege game and the number of game balls not entered in the variable winning means is larger than a predetermined number. A gaming machine B2 characterized by performing an effect that is advantageous to a person.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, when the number of gaming balls lost to the player without winning the variable winning means is larger than the predetermined number, the effect is advantageous to the player. Is executed, the bonus game is played in a game mode in which the game ball is released (not stopped), and when the operation of the variable winning means is grasped and the game ball is closed, the game ball does not reach the variable winning means. It is possible to reduce the difference in profit given to the player between the case of playing in the game mode of adjusting and firing (stopping) in such a manner.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, the variable winning means is a gaming ball that opens and closes based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the privileged game and enters the variable winning means, and is in the open state of the variable winning means. An opening / closing means for entering the corresponding number of game balls into the effect area corresponding to the number of times the state changes, and a ball entry detection means capable of detecting the game balls entering the effect area by satisfying a predetermined detection condition. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the predetermined detection condition is such that a predetermined multiple of the corresponding number of balls enters the effect area during a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it can be grasped that a predetermined detection condition is satisfied based on the detection of the ball by the ball entry detecting means, and a predetermined period of time can be obtained. Since it is possible to determine the number of times the opening / closing means has been opened / closed during the period, it is possible to determine the difference in the execution interval and the execution period of the privileged game by calculating from the number of times of opening / closing.

Therefore, for example, when a rare event occurs in which privileged games occur continuously at short intervals, the ball is set to be detected by the ball entry detecting means, and the ball is detected by the ball entry detecting means. By executing a specific effect based on the above, it is possible to notify the player of the rarity occurring in the player, and it is possible to enhance the player's uplifting feeling.

The predetermined conditions for opening and closing the opening / closing means are not limited at all. For example, it may be opened and closed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the privilege game, or it may be opened and closed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of opening the variable winning means a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined input is possible. It may be opened and closed based on the player operating the operating means during the period.

Further, the number of times the opening / closing means is opened / closed during one privilege game is not limited at all. For example, it may be once or multiple times. In addition, the opening / closing timing can be set arbitrarily.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the multi-type effect executing means has a retention means for retaining a game ball that has entered the effect region on the upstream side of the ball entry detection means, and a game retained in the retention means. The specific effect is provided with an avoidance means for causing the ball to flow down while avoiding the ball entry detection means, and the specific effect is set to one opening / closing operation of the variable winning means after the game ball stays in the retention means. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that a specific effect of causing the gaming ball to flow down can be executed by the avoidance means after the elapse of the waiting period, which is a period longer than the maximum time.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the avoidance means for discharging the balls staying in the staying means has a variable winning means for the waiting period until the staying balls are discharged. Since the period is longer than the maximum time set for one opening / closing operation, the ball can be retained in the holding means while the variable winning means is opened / closed a plurality of times.

In the game machine B4, in the privilege game, the ball entry detecting means detects the game ball while the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing means is less than the number of times the corresponding number of game balls are inserted into the effect area. A gaming machine B5, characterized in that a specific notification effect is executed based on the above.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, in the privilege game, the ball entry detecting means is used while the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing means is less than the number of times the corresponding number of gaming balls are inserted into the production area. When detecting a game ball, it can be equated with the case where the game ball that had entered the production area in the previous privilege game remains without being discharged, and multiple privilege games can be detected within a short period of time. It can be determined that it has occurred. In this case, by executing a specific notification effect, the player can grasp that a plurality of privileged games have occurred in a short time from the notification effect, and can enhance the player's uplifting feeling. ..

The gaming machine B4 or B5 includes an operating means that can be operated by the player and a signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operating means according to a predetermined operating rule, and outputs the signal. The gaming machine B6, characterized in that the waiting period is extended based on the output of a signal by the means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the gaming ball retained in the retaining means is maintained beyond the initially set waiting period based on the player operating the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the variable winning means has a long open state in which the game ball is maintained for a sufficient time as the open state and an insufficient state for the game ball to enter. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that either one of the short open state maintained for a long period of time is executed based on a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, depending on whether the opening mode constituting the open state is the long open state or the short open state, the effect is produced during a predetermined period. It is possible to switch whether or not a predetermined multiple of the corresponding number of balls can be inserted into the area. That is, the difference in the opening pattern of the variable winning means can be associated with whether or not the ball passes through the winning ball detecting means.

<Points where players work independently to maintain favorable notifications>
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a predetermined lottery result. It is possible to change from the closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter to the open state where it is easy to enter in the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the display of and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. In a gaming machine provided with variable winning means, the operating means can be operated by a player, an instruction means for instructing an operation mode of the operation means in a plurality of modes, and the operation means operated according to the instruction of the instruction means. Provided with a profit-giving means for increasing the profit given to the player when the operating means is operated according to the instruction of the instructing means as compared with the profit given to the player if the operation is not performed. The gaming machine C1 characterized by.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with operating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the menu screen can be displayed and the effect can be set by operating the operating means, and the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means and the magnitude of the profit given to the player can be determined. Since it is not related to, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the operation motivation for the operation means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, operating the operating means as instructed by the instructing means increases the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means, and thus the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operating means. Can be improved.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is maintained on the maximum side based on the operation of the operating means by the player as instructed by the instruction means. Amusement machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, by operating the operating means as instructed by the instructing means, the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is maintained on the maximum side. It is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the means.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the operating means is not operated according to the instruction of the instructing means, the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is set to be sustainable based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine C3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, even if the operating means is not operated according to the instruction of the instructing means, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means. Therefore, the stress given to the player can be alleviated as compared with the case where the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is reduced if all the instructions of the instructing means are not followed. As a result, it is possible to secure the playing time of the player.

The mode of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way. For example, under the condition that the operation failure of the operating means is allowed in a plurality of specified times, the predetermined condition may be satisfied that the number of operation failures has not reached the specified number of times, and the predetermined invalid period is When it is set not to determine the failure of the operation, the fact that the failure of the operation occurs during the invalid period may be satisfied as the predetermined condition.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the instruction means generates an instruction related to the privilege game, and the state of the profit-giving means before operating the operation means based on the instruction is determined. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being set to be the same in the privileged gaming.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, it is possible to improve the motivation for operating the operating means as compared with the case where the state of the profit-giving means changes for each privilege game. can.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the instruction means can execute a re-instruction effect for prompting an instruction as instructed based on the fact that the operation of the operation means was not performed as instructed by the instruction means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the player is urged to give instructions as instructed by the re-instruction effect, so that the player can operate without noticing the instruction of the instruction means. If it has failed, it is possible to easily prevent the operation from failing again.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the instruction means generates an instruction related to the privilege game, and the profit-giving means operates the operation means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that a predetermined benefit can be given to a player before.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, it is possible to give a predetermined profit to the player by the profit-giving means before the operating means is operated, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player and improve the interest, as compared with the case where the profit is always given after the operation of the operating means.

The mode of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way. For example, a case where a big hit can be obtained by holding a special symbol (in the case of a so-called "holding ream") may be a predetermined condition, or a case where a ball wins a variable winning means at a specific timing may be a predetermined condition.

In the gaming machine C6, the instruction means is characterized in that an omission effect of canceling an instruction scheduled after a predetermined benefit is given to the player by the benefit giving means is performed.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the stress given to the player is increased as compared with the case where the instruction of the operating means is given to the player even after the predetermined benefit is given to the player by the profit giving means. Can be reduced. That is, by omitting the operation instruction that is not related to the profit given to the player, it is possible to improve the added value to the instruction of the operation means and secure the game time of the player.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the variable winning means changes from the closed state to the open state before the instruction from the indicating means is generated.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the variable winning means changes to the open state before the instruction from the instruction means is generated, so that the instruction of the instruction means is not waited for. You can start a special game. As a result, the start timing of the privilege game can be advanced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the profit-giving means is configured to change the operation mode of a predetermined game ball according to the operation mode of the operation means, and the game is played by changing the operation mode of the predetermined game ball. A gaming machine C9 characterized by changing the profit given to a person.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the profit given to the player changes due to the change in the movement of the predetermined gaming ball. Compared to the notification that the result can be expected to be decided from the beginning, it is possible to improve the interest of the player (the movement mode of the ball can be delighted).

Among the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B7, and C1 to C9, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B7, and C1 to C9, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B7, and C1 to C9, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (operation means)
37a, 37b LED (display means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of instruction means, part of profit-giving means)
201 MPU (lottery means, privilege game execution means)
221 MPU (part of regulatory means, part of multi-type staging execution means)
226 Voice output device (part of instruction means, part of profit-giving means)
227 Lamp display means (part of instruction means, part of profit-giving means)
650 Second variable winning device (variable winning means)
650a 2nd Specified Winning Door (part of guidance means)
657 Storage plate (opening / closing means, state changing means)
800 ball production device (part of production area, part of production means)
840 rotating disk (movable means, part of switching part, part of avoidance means, part of profit-giving means)
841f3 recessed part (passing preparation part)
845 1st guide hole (2nd receiving part)
846 Second guide hole (first receiving part, retaining means)
KH1 1st through hole (passing means)
KM1 drive motor (part of multi-type staging execution means)
SC1 detection sensor (detection means, part of ball entry detection means, part of profit-giving means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-150122

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the operation motivation for the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily improving the motivation to operate an operating means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a display means for displaying the lottery result. In the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the display of the identification information indicating that the display means is the predetermined lottery result, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the game ball is In a gaming machine provided with a variable winning means that can be changed from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a ball to an open state in which it is easy to enter a ball, an operating means that can be operated by a player and an operating mode of the operating means are instructed in a plurality of modes. Compared to the instruction means to be used and the profit given to the player when the operation means is not operated according to the instruction of the instruction means, the player when the operation means is operated according to the instruction of the instruction means. It is provided with a profit-giving means for increasing the profit given to the slingshot.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the motivation for operating the operating means can be satisfactorily improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front view of the internal flow path of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is a partial front view of the internal flow path of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is a partial front view of the internal flow path of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a rear case. It is a front perspective view of the ball production device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sphere effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sphere effect device. It is a rear perspective view of a ball effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a sphere effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a sphere effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating disk. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating disk. (A) is a front view of the rotating disk, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating disk in the XVIIb-XVIIb line of FIG. 17 (a), and (c) is a rear view of the rotating disk. Is. It is a schematic front view of the rotating disk which extracted only the outer shape of the rotating disk. (A) is a top view of the ball staging device, (b) is a partial front view of the ball staging device, and (c) is a portion of the ball staging device in the XIXc-XIXc line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a sectional view. It is a front view of the ball effect device in the 1st receiving state. It is sectional drawing of the sphere effect device in the XXI-XXI line of FIG. It is a front view of the ball effect device in the 2nd receiving state. It is sectional drawing of the sphere staging apparatus in line XXIII-XXIII of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of a rolling flow path portion, a second cylindrical portion, and a first through hole in the XXIII-XXIII line of FIG. 22. It is a front view of the ball effect device in the example of the receiving prevention state. It is a front view of the ball effect device in the example of the receiving prevention state. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd cylindrical part. (A) to (c) are front views of the second cylindrical portion showing the posture change of the second tubular portion. It is a figure which showed the example of the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd specific winning opening in the 1st operation pattern, and the example of the time change of the rotating disk of the ball effect device in 1st production example. It is a figure which showed the example of the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd specific winning opening in the 1st operation pattern, and the example of the time change of the rotating disk of the ball effect device in 1st production example. It is a figure which showed an example of the timekeeping change of the rotating disk of the ball effect device in the 1st specific winning opening, the 2nd specific winning opening and the 2nd effect example in the 2nd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed an example of the timekeeping change of the rotating disk of the ball effect device in the 1st specific winning opening, the 2nd specific winning opening and the 2nd effect example in the 3rd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed an example of the time change of a storage plate and the time change of a ball effect device with respect to a jackpot game. It is a figure which showed an example of the time change of a storage plate and the time change of a ball effect device with respect to a jackpot game.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations above and below the left side (arrow L side) of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is attached. The inner frame 12 is supported as an opening / closing axis so as to be openable / closable toward the front side (arrow F side).

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails (not shown), winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front surface is provided. In order to support the front frame 14, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side (arrow L side) of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. 14 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side (arrow F side) of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. Further, the lower plate 15 is formed so as to project toward the front side below the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed by inclining downward to the right side (arrow R side), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 passes through the launch supply port 17k (see FIG. 12) due to the inclination, and the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12). (See Fig. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface (side surface of the arrow U) of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. In addition, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in the upper left portion (arrow L, U side portion) of the front view of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), and an indicator lamp capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is displayed. 34 is provided.

Further, on the lower side (arrow D side) of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side (arrow R side), a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate stamp or the like attached to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front of the board 13 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c (in the direction of arrow D). The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

The lower plate 15 located on the lower side (arrow D side) of the upper plate 17 is a ball receiving portion for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17, and is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. Has been done. On the right side (arrow R side) of the lower plate 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 15 when the ball stored in the lower plate 15 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 15. Each time the ball pulling lever 52 is pushed in, the bottom surface opening 15a formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 is switched between an open state and a closed state. When the bottom opening 15a is opened, the ball naturally falls from the bottom opening 15a and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 15 (generally referred to as a "Senryobako"; hereinafter the same) is placed below the lower plate 15. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 15 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 15.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral edge is on the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). It is attached. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. In FIG. 2, the structure arranged on the back surface side of the base plate 60 is not shown. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13 (the portion on the U side of the arrow). A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2, upper portion on the arrow L side), and the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. The situation that it ends up is prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part of FIG. 2, upper part on the R side of the arrow) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum or more is returned. When it hits the rubber 69, it is repelled toward the center while the momentum is attenuated. Further, an arc connecting the rails is provided on the inner surface side between the tip of the inner rail 61 on the lower right side (lower on the arrow R side) and the tip on the upper right side of the outer rail 62 (upper on the arrow R side). The resin arc member 70 formed in the above is driven into the base plate 60 and fixed.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally opens the entrance 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is also determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined to be a big hit of the special symbol with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probabilistic state of the special symbol), 60 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entry into the first entrance 64 is referred to as "the lottery of the special symbol 1", and the lottery is performed for the entry into the second entry 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the special symbol becomes a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is set for a predetermined time (specified time (for example, 30 seconds)). The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds) until a lapse of time or until 10 balls are won. As a result, a large amount of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual.

There are six types of special symbols, "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit a", "big hit b", and "big hit c". The opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are configured differently depending on the jackpot type.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. It is also displayed and is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

In the present embodiment, after the jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a), the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a special symbol from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. It is configured to shift to the state (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c), the normal symbol time is shortened until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

It should be noted that the added value after the jackpot game is not limited to those described above. For example, as an added value after the end of the big hit, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times, and the lottery of the special symbol ends 100 times. After that, it may be configured to be set to the normal state.

The number of lottery of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times. Further, the number of times of lottery for the special symbol in which the above-mentioned normal symbol is shortened is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the subsequent big hit increases as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high-probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

Further, the "normal symbol time saving state" (during the time saving) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. Further, the "normal state" means a state of the game in which neither the probability change of the special symbol nor the time reduction of the normal symbol is increased (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is reached. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased from the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

A plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided on the upper right side of the front view (the part on the arrow R and U sides in FIG. 2) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first entrance 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is reserved up to 4 times for each type of entry slot, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of a normal pattern). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot a, jackpot b, and jackpot c) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 to display the third symbol. The second symbol is variablely displayed triggered by the passage of a ball of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display and a ball of a normal entry port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is displayed. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", "big hit c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", it is one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols with the addition of are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

Next, a display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily released when the special symbol is probablely changed or the normal symbol is shortened, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, although the details will be described later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a big hit (big hit a) where the maximum profit can be obtained, as compared with the case where a big hit is made by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball. Therefore, in the probable change state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit or the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right-handed strike. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probable change state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right, which is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probable change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the player can perform the probabilistic change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. This prevents situations in which the benefits of becoming a vehicle are not fully received.

In the right-handed navigation, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the character is turned to the right (pointing in the direction of arrow R) above and below (arrow U side and arrow D side). The arrows are displayed three by three. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, the player can benefit from the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be performing a right-handed strike even though the player is not in a period in which the ball should be launched (right-handed) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed to the third symbol display device 81 in this case. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state (a state in which neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol is performed).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640). For this reason, if a right-handed strike is performed in a normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the ball is launched aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed strike. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to make a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

When it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the characters "warning" and "play left-handed!" To the third symbol display device 81. Characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not hit right (should hit left). Further, the clerk in the hall can also easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of performing right-handed in a normal state by confirming the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen.

As a method of determining whether or not a player is hitting right, for example, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) where the ball can flow in when hitting right. Judgment is made based on whether or not the ball has been hit.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), an illegal game is performed. It may be configured to display a right-handed warning image by determining that the image is present. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), fraud is performed against the hall computer. It may be configured to output a signal indicating that the signal is being output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraudulent activity is being performed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 will be described. Here, when an abnormality occurs in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650, for example, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). An example is the case where a ball entering the mouth 650a is detected.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the text "Call the gate error staff" is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is unsuccessful, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol of “◯” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game. As a result, during the probable change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is in the open state. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the right side of the game board (arrow R side). ) Is configured to be able to pass through a part of the ball flowing down. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is out of order. If there is, the symbol of "x" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (arrow R direction), and is, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (arrow L direction). ) Is fine. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80 (in the direction of arrow D), a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entrance 64, the first entry switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged below the front view (direction of arrow D) of the first ball entry port 64. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the second entrance switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right out openings 661 are arranged at positions shifted to the left and right from the lowermost end of the game area, and a second winning opening 640 is provided at a position between them (near the lowermost end of the game area). Arranged. That is, the second winning opening 640 provided with the electric accessory 640a that opens and closes on both the left and right sides is arranged in a positional relationship sandwiched between the out openings 661 from the left and right.

Further, the first entry slot 64 and the second entry slot 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize, respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry port 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state, standing on the arrow L side, see FIG. 2), and the ball is a second entry port. It is difficult to win a prize in 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the electric combination The object 640a is in an open state (enlarged state, tilted toward the arrow R side (tilted from the vicinity of the lower end)), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. It becomes easier to display the symbol of "○" on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probable change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the prize in the second entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state depending on whether the ball wins in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. be. However, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit A, big hit a) where the maximum profit (outgoing ball) is obtained as the type of big hit selected in the case of a big hit is when the ball wins in the second entrance 640. Is set higher than when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Toward, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first ball entrance 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640, a ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"). ), It is advantageous for the player to aim to win a big hit by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second entrance 640. Will be.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the player can be entertained.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and a first specific winning opening (large opening) is arranged as a long opening in the left-right direction in a substantially central portion thereof. Mouth) 65a is provided. A second variable winning device 650 is arranged between the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second variable winning device 65. The details of the second variable winning device 650 will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery caused by winning a prize in the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, wins a prize until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, or 10 balls are won. Until) will be released.

The first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a can be repeated with a predetermined number of times (15 times (15 rounds) in the present embodiment) as the maximum number of times in total. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual (in the present embodiment). (15) prize balls will be paid out based on the prize of one ball.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 operates an opening / closing plate that forms an open state for guiding the ball to the first specific winning opening 65a by retracting to the inside of the game board 13, and a large opening / closing plate thereof. It is equipped with an open port solenoid. Normally, the opening / closing plate is in a closed state in which the ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first specific winning opening 65a. In the case of a big hit, the opening / closing plate is retracted by driving the large opening solenoid, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which it is easy to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state are alternated. The solenoid operates to repeat.

In the present embodiment, when the player strikes right, if the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, there is a high probability that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a will be opened. On the other hand, since the general winning opening 63 is arranged on the upstream side of the first variable winning device 65, a part of the launched ball will win the general winning opening 63. , The opening and closing operation time (opening time) of the first specific winning opening 65a is likely to be different each time. That is, when the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, if 10 balls are hit with a right-handed hit, or if the balls do not win in the general winning opening 63, the 10 balls are the first specific winning opening 65a. Since there is a possibility of winning a prize, the first specific winning opening 65a shifts to the closed state with the winning of 10 balls (a specified number of balls). On the other hand, when a ball wins in the general winning opening 63, the number of balls heading to the first specific winning opening 65a is less than 10, so all the remaining balls win in the first specific winning opening 65a. However, the first specific winning opening 65a is maintained in the open state. Therefore, since it is necessary to launch an additional ball, there will be a difference in the opening / closing operation time (opening time) of the first specific winning opening 65a.

As a result, among the balls fired by right-handed hitting, most of the balls flowing downward on the right side of the second variable winning device 650 are guided to the first variable winning device 65, even if the board configuration is such that the interval is long. The time required for the jackpot game when stopping (adjusting the launch mode so that the ball guided by the variable winning devices 65, 650 does not occur when the variable winning devices 65, 650 are closed) is the interval. It is possible to make it easier to extend the time required for the jackpot game when the pause is not performed (when left unattended).

Here, the player who has a higher experience value of the game may frequently stop the interval for the purpose of improving the ball holding. On the other hand, if there is a large difference in the profit obtained by the jackpot game of the same jackpot symbol between the beginner and the beginner depending on whether or not the interval is stopped, the fairness of the game is lacking.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game is played on the premise that the interval is stopped, it is uncertain how many balls will enter the general winning opening 63 upstream of the game before being guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to make it uncertain how many balls should be fired before the fire should be stopped. For example, if 10 balls (specified number of balls) are fired in order to reduce wasted balls, and the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 63 is to be fired again later, a new ball is fired by that amount (at intervals). Since the time required for the round game R is extended by the time until the ball is guided to the first variable winning device 65), the time required for the jackpot game R for stopping the interval can be extended.

On the other hand, since this extension of time is not caused by making it difficult for the ball to be guided by the first variable winning device 65, the game board 13 does not pass through the general winning opening 63 when playing a big hit game by leaving it unattended. The ball flowing down the front side of the ball is quickly guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time required for the jackpot game R from being extended when the jackpot game is performed by leaving it untouched.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by intentionally extending the time required for the jackpot game R when the game in which the interval pause is performed is performed, the damage (waste) suffered by the player when the interval pause is not performed. It can be balanced with the generation of spheres). If the interval stop is not performed, the time for receiving the lottery can be secured as much as the jackpot game ends quickly, so that it is easy to shorten the period until the next jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of balls from being greatly changed due to the difference in the experience value of the game.

At the right corner (arrow R side corner) on the lower side (arrow D side) of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided, and the sticking space K1 is stuck. The stamps and the like can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64 (in the direction of the arrow D side). A ball that flows down the game area and does not win a prize in any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Run.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the shaft and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 can issue various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, etc.) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, another device 228 (for example, a drive motor KM1), a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as the variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

It will be described back to FIG. The second variable winning device 650 is arranged in a region where the ball flows down below the through gate 67, and is in an open state of tilting to the right with the lower end as an axis so that the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 650a. And the open / close plate drive solenoid (commercially available solenoid, solenoid 209) that can change the state in a closed state that prevents the ball from rising to the left around the same axis and being guided to the second specified winning opening 650a (included in the commercially available solenoid, solenoid 209). A solenoid plate 651 driven by)) and an introduction flow path DR that is arranged facing the solenoid plate 651 and extends to the second specific winning opening 650a and guides the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a. An intermediate flow from the upstream end of the ball receiving wall portion 652 forming the wall portion on one side (left side) and the lower side wall portion forming the intermediate flow path TR through which the ball passing through the second specified winning opening 650a flows down. It is provided with an upstream lower wall portion 653 extending to the left to the junction of the road TR. The upstream lower wall portion 653 is configured as an inclined wall portion having an inclination with respect to the horizontal direction (in the present embodiment, the inclination angle is about 5 degrees).

Further, the second variable winning device 650 has a communication opening 654 that opens in the front-rear direction so that a ball flowing down the intermediate flow path TR can pass along the extension direction of the upstream lower wall portion 653, and an intermediate flow path TR. To the upstream lower wall portion 653 at the position between the discharge opening 655, which is opened in the front-rear direction so that the ball flowing downward from the branch point of the above can pass, and the discharge opening 655 and the upstream side lower wall portion 653 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a storage convex portion 656 that is projected from the left side in an approaching manner.

Further, the second variable winning device 650 is extended in a plate shape from the root side of the storage convex portion 656 to the lower left, and the ball P1 (in each round game R described later, the opening / closing plate 651 is opened at the beginning. A support that supports the vertical movement of the storage plate 657 while forming an opening in the vertical direction in the ball receiving bottom portion 656a in which the ball passing through the second specific winning opening 650a) is configured to be rollable. With an opening 656b.

Further, the second variable winning device 650 is in a permissible state and an intermediate flow path TR that retracts downward from the intermediate flow path TR and allows the passage of a ball at a position between the storage convex portion 656 and the communication opening 654 in the left-right direction. It is driven by a storage plate drive solenoid (commercially available solenoid and other devices included in device 228 (see FIG. 4)) so that the state can be changed in a regulated state that overhangs inward (upward from the allowable state) and restricts the passage of the ball. A storage plate 657 and a ball receiving upper wall portion 658 that is vertically opposed to the storage convex portion 656 and is inclined downward as it approaches the storage plate 657 in the upper wall portion of the intermediate flow path TR. Be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a partial front view of the internal flow path of the second variable winning device 650. The lower end of the ball receiving wall portion 652 is arranged at a position where the distance W1 from the opening / closing plate 651 in the closed state is at least twice the diameter of the ball. As a result, another ball passes through the second specific winning opening 650a while the ball remains in the introduction flow path DR, and another ball is additionally introduced while the opening / closing plate 651 operates to the closed state. Even when the ball enters the road DR, the width of the introduction flow path DR is sufficiently secured, so that the ball protrudes from the introduction flow path DR and collides with the opening / closing plate 651, or the ball is weighted on the opening / closing plate 651. Since it is possible to avoid the continuous application, it is possible to prevent the ball from hindering the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 651.

The internal flow path of the second variable winning device 650 has a front-rear width slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere in the downstream of the second specific winning opening 650a, and the flow path and the storage plate whose upstream side lower wall portion 653 constitutes one side. The vertical width of the flow path on the downstream side of 657 is configured to have a width dimension of about 1.1 times the diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down smoothly and the later ball from overtaking the earlier ball. The area on the left side of the lower wall portion 653 on the upstream side and on the right side of the storage plate 657 has a longer vertical width as compared with other areas. This makes it easier for the ball radiated to the left of the lower wall portion 653 on the upstream side to flow down in a parabolic trajectory.

The communication opening 654 is arranged on the front side of the rolling flow path portion 870, which will be described later, and is an opening that guides the passing ball to the rolling path forming portion 874 of the rolling flow path portion 870.

A part of the balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 650a abuts on the storage plate 657. The internal shape of the second variable winning device 650 is designed so that the period from passing through the opening / closing plate 651 to reaching the storage plate 657 does not exceed 1 second. The reason why the period from passing through the opening / closing plate 651 until the ball reaches the storage plate 657 is set to 1 second depends on the relationship with the timing of the state change of the storage plate 657, but will be described in detail later. ..

The ball receiving upper wall portion 658 is arranged so as to face the upstream lower wall portion 653 in the flow direction of the rolling ball, and is extended downward from the receiving portion 658a for receiving the rolling ball and the lower end of the receiving portion 658a. It is provided with a flow angle adjusting unit 658b for adjusting the flow angle of a ball in the middle of flow.

The receiving portion 658a is inclined downward along a straight line KB1 having a gradient larger than the gradient of the downward inclination of the upstream lower wall portion 653 (in the present embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction is about 30 degrees), and the flow angle adjusting portion is provided. 658b inclines downward along a straight line KB2 having a gradient larger than that of the straight line KB1 (in the present embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction is about 40 degrees). As a result, the direction of the velocity of the ball flowing down while contacting the ball receiving upper wall portion 658 can be gradually changed from the left direction to the downward direction, and the ball bounces to the right when it collides with the storage plate 657. Can be prevented.

With reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the shape of the storage convex portion 656 and the flow mode of the sphere will be described. 6 and 7 are partial front views of the internal flow path of the second variable winning device 650. In FIG. 6, the ball P1 guided by the intermediate flow path TR and rolling on the upstream lower wall portion 653 abuts on the storage plate 657 in the regulated state and is restricted from flowing down. After the state of 6, the state in which the sphere P2 flowing down the intermediate flow path TR collides with the sphere P1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 6, the storage convex portion 656 is convexly provided at a radius equal to or more than the radius ra of the sphere below the left lower end portion of the upstream lower wall portion 653 with a gradient similar to that of the straight line KB2, and the upstream lower wall portion 653. The separation width H1 between the left lower end portion and the storage convex portion 656 is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere (twice the radius ra) (in the present embodiment, the length is 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). Set in). When the sphere P1 protrudes to the right of the storage convex portion 656, the length of the separation width H1 is based on the distance between the sphere P1 whose flow is restricted by the storage plate 657 and the upstream lower wall portion 653. It may be defined as. In this case, the sphere P2 is set to be slightly longer than the sum of the dimension in which the sphere P1 protrudes from the storage convex portion 656 along the straight line defining the separation width H1 and the diameter of the sphere. It is possible to secure a sufficient separation width H1 for passing.

In addition, the storage convex portion 656 is convexly provided in a manner (upper surface shape and positional relationship) in which the upper surface is along the outer circumference of the first sphere whose flow is restricted and stayed on the storage plate 657. Therefore, since the sphere P1 is supported by the storage convex portion 656 from the lower right when colliding with the storage plate 657, when the sphere P1 reaches the storage plate 657, or when the sphere P2 and the sphere P1 come later, It is possible to prevent the ball P1 from bouncing to the right due to the load applied to the right from the storage plate 657 when the ball collides with the other. That is, the sphere P1 can be easily maintained at the position shown in FIG.

When the convex length of the storage convex portion 656 is set within a range that does not exceed the right end portion of the ball P1 whose flow is restricted to the storage plate 657, it collides with the ball P1 as shown in FIG. Since the ball P2 flowing down between the upstream lower wall portion 653 and the storage convex portion 656 can be prevented from colliding with the storage convex portion 656, the ball P2 can be smoothly discharged.

In the ball receiving wall portion 658, the minimum separation width MIH2, which is the minimum value of the separation width of the ball P1 which is restricted from flowing down by the storage plate 657 and is stopped with the right hemisphere, is set to be smaller than the diameter of the ball P2. As a result, it is dimensionally restricted that the sphere P2 passes between the sphere receiving wall portion 658 and the sphere P1 and passes to the left of the center of the sphere P1.

According to the present embodiment, according to the above-described configuration, the ball P1 flowing down the intermediate flow path TR rolls on the upstream lower wall portion 653 along the arrow X1, collides with the ball receiving upper wall portion 658, and flows down. After being adjusted, it collides with the storage plate 657 and stops (see FIG. 6).

In the present embodiment, since the tip of the storage convex portion 656 (one end of the separation width H1) is arranged below the arrow X1 (the arrow along the flow locus of the sphere P1), the sphere P1 is the storage convex portion 656. The possibility of collision with the tip can be reduced, and the ball P1 flowing down along the arrow X1 can be prevented from falling between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a. In addition, the direction of the arrow X1 (downward left) and the opening direction of the passage between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a (the direction orthogonal to the arrow shown as the separation width H1 and the downward right direction) are left and right. Since it is configured in the opposite direction, it is possible to prevent the sphere P1 from falling between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a unless the sphere P1 is bounced to the right.

Here, in the present embodiment, the ball P1 separated from the upstream lower wall portion 653 along the arrow X1 collides with the receiving portion 658a of the ball receiving upper wall portion 658, and the gradient of the receiving portion 658a is in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, it is set to about 30 degrees, and the gradient of the upstream side wall portion 653 is set to about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction, so that the incident angle of the sphere P1 with respect to the receiving portion 658a is 65 degrees. If the sphere P1 bounces at a reflection angle of 65 degrees after the collision, the sphere P1 will have a velocity component to the left even after being bounced, and will not be bounced to the right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sphere P1 from falling between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the support opening 656b includes a protrusion projecting toward the storage plate 657 at one point in the vertical direction, and the protrusion 657 supports the storage plate 657. Further, the storage plate 657 is supported by a storage plate drive solenoid (commercially available solenoid and other devices included in the device 228 (see FIG. 4)) with a slight rattling in the left-right direction at the lower end portion. .. Therefore, the storage plate 657 is configured to be easily rattled by a load in the left-right direction.

Due to this rattling, the load generated when the sphere P1 collides with the storage plate 657 or when the sphere P1 collides with the sphere P1 (see FIG. 7) and the sphere P1 presses the storage plate 657 is absorbed. Can be done. As a result, the impact given to the storage plate 657 can be alleviated, the durability of the storage plate 657 can be improved, and the distance at which the sphere P1 rebounds after colliding with the storage plate 657 can be shortened. It is possible to prevent accidentally bouncing over the storage convex portion 656 to the right and flowing down between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a.

On the other hand, the ball P2 flows down the ball receiving wall portion 658 and then flows down along the arrow X2, and is restricted from moving to the left between the right hemisphere of the ball P1 and the ball receiving upper wall portion 658. After that, it flows down along the outer peripheral surface of the sphere P1 and is guided to the discharge opening 655.

The timing at which the storage plate 657 is allowed is defined as a time point after the sphere P2 has passed between the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a. For example, as will be described later as a first effect example, the operation timing of the storage plate 657 is such that the ball passing through the opening / closing plate 651 just before the opening / closing plate 651 is closed has the storage convex portion 656 and the curved wall portion 655a. The sum of the time that can be arranged on the upstream side of the interval (30 seconds, which is the maximum time of the operating time T1) and the time, which is less than 1 second, that is the time until the ball passing through the opening / closing plate 651 reaches the storage plate 657. The operating time TSa (35 seconds), which is longer than the operating time (less than 31 seconds), is set when the operating time T1 has elapsed from the start.

Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the sphere P2 from flowing down to the lower left side of the storage convex portion 656, the sphere that passes through the storage plate 657 and flows down when the storage plate 657 becomes an allowable state is limited to the sphere P1. can do.

In the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 655a, which is arranged to face the storage convex portion 656 as a wall portion for guiding the flowing ball and extends from the left lower end of the upstream lower wall portion 653 to the discharge opening 655, is a ball. It is formed in an arc shape with the vicinity of the center of P1 as the axis. Thereby, the sphere P2 can be guided to the discharge opening 655 by utilizing the force in the arc direction of the sphere P2 flowing down along the outer peripheral surface of the sphere P1.

Also, when the sphere P2 is dropped without being guided by an arc-shaped wall, the velocity direction of the sphere P2 is closer to the vertical direction, and it is easy to accelerate due to gravity, which may cause a large bounce (bounce back). In the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the sphere P2 that has reached the front side of the discharge opening 655 by the curved wall portion 655a is the tangential direction of the circle with the center of the sphere P1 as the axis (direction having a sufficient horizontal component). ) Can be directed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the velocity of the ball flowing down while abutting on the curved wall portion 655a is reversed left and right during the flow, so that the velocity in the left-right direction does not become excessively large.

Therefore, while suppressing the excessive acceleration of the sphere P2 due to gravity, it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of acceleration in the left-right direction, and the sphere P2 can flow down with substantially constant velocity movement (constant velocity rotational movement). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball P2 from bouncing back when it reaches the front of the discharge opening 655, and the ball P2 can be smoothly discharged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the storage plate 657 is in the regulated state, only one ball that first flows down the intermediate flow path TR can be stopped on the right side of the storage plate 657, and the ball P1 By switching the storage plate 657 from the stationary state to the allowable state (by retracting downward from the state shown in FIG. 6), the ball P1 flows down to the left and is supplied to the ball staging device 800 through the communication opening 654. Can be done.

FIG. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the rear case 200. The rear case 200 is a box-shaped unit that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13 and whose front side is open. A ball staging device 800 is arranged at the lower inside of the rear case 200. The ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 and has passed through the communication opening 654 is supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870 of the ball staging device 800. The ball effecting device 800 is a device that is visually recognized by the player through the game board 60 and that produces an effect using a ball.

Next, the ball effect device 800 will be described. 9 is a front perspective view of the ball staging device 800, FIGS. 10 and 11 are exploded front perspective views of the ball staging device 800, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the ball staging device 800, FIG. 13 And FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the ball staging device 800.

The ball effect device 800 is a device that performs an effect using a ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 650a, and is attached to a base member 810 that is fastened and fixed to the lower part of the back case 200 and a back side of the base member 810. A flow path constituent plate 820 that is fastened and fixed and forms a flow path of a sphere between the base member 810 and the flow path constituent plate 820 are arranged on the back surface side of the flow path constituent plate 820 and transmit the driving force of the drive motor KM1. The front side of the rotary disk 840, which rotates by the driving force transmitted by the transmission mechanism section 830 and the transmission mechanism section 830, and which can accommodate a sphere inside, and the lower half of the rotary disk 840. Inside the ball that has passed through the front cover 850 that is covered from the base member 810 and fastened and fixed to the base member 810, the left and right covers 860 that are fastened and fixed to the front side and the back side at both left and right ends of the base member 810, and the second winning opening 640. Mainly includes a rolling flow path portion 870 that guides a ball that has reached the ball effect device 800 to the rotating disk 840.

The base member 810 is formed in a plate shape, and has a main body plate portion 811 having through holes KH1 and KH2 formed in a size that allows a sphere to pass through and a shaft hole JH that pivotally supports the rotary disk 840, and the main body plate thereof. The outer wall portion 812 extending in a plate shape to the back surface side of the portion 811 and forming a groove surrounding the range including the through holes KH1 and KH2, and the through holes KH1 and KH2 in the range surrounded by the outer wall portion 812. It is formed by a partition wall portion 813 extending in a plate shape to the back side of the main body plate portion 811 as a partition plate for partitioning the space, and a partition wall portion 813 and an outer wall portion 812 near the lower end portion of the partition wall portion 813. A pair of through elongated holes 814 that are formed through the base member 810 in the plate thickness direction in the range extending in the left-right direction of the groove, and are longer than the front-rear dimension of the main body plate portion 811 at positions separated from each other to the left and right of the main body plate portion 811. Driven at the lower left of the main body plate 811 and the separation frame plate 815 which is formed by the front-rear width and is connected near the upper and lower ends of the main body plate 811 to form a space between the main body plate 811 and the main body plate 811 in the front-rear direction. A ball flowing down either of the motor support portion 816 to which the motor KM1 is fastened and fixed and the flow path formed on the left and right of the second partition plate 813b below the through elongated hole 814 is accepted and turned to the right side. It mainly includes a plate-shaped terminal merging plate portion 817 that inclines downward.

In the outer wall portion 812, the upper frame portion 812a near the first through hole KH1 and the lower frame portion 812b below the second through hole KH2 have the same extension length, and the upper frame portion 812a and the lower side An intermediate frame portion 812c connecting the frame portions 812b in the vicinity of the second through hole KH2 is formed with an extension length slightly shorter than the extension length of the upper frame portion 812a and the lower frame portion 812b.

The partition wall portion 813 has a first partition plate 813a that partitions the proximity side of the first through hole KH1 and the second through hole KH2, and a second partition extending along a side extending in the vertical direction of the second through hole KH2. It mainly includes a plate 813b, and a tubular partition cylinder portion 813c that connects the first partition plate 813a and the second partition plate 813b and forms a shaft hole JH.

The extension length of the first partition plate 813a and the second partition plate 813b toward the back side is the same as the extension length of the upper frame portion 812a and the lower frame portion 812b of the outer wall portion 812, and the partition cylinder portion. The axial extension length of the 813c is formed to be slightly longer than the extension length toward the back surface side of the first partition plate 813a and the second partition plate 813b.

The upper surface of the first partition plate 813a is inclined downward toward the side close to the partition cylinder portion 813c, and the end portion on the side close to the partition cylinder portion 813c is connected to the upper end position of the partition cylinder portion 813c. As a result, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the first partition plate 813a is allowed to pass above the partition cylinder portion 813c to the right without being dammed at the upper end position of the partition cylinder portion 813c (without being decelerated). Can be done.

The second partition plate 813b is formed on a straight line that passes through the central axis of the partition cylinder portion 813c and faces the vertical direction.

Detection sensors SC1 and SC2 for detecting the passage of a sphere are inserted through the elongated hole 814.

The separation frame plate 815 is a narrow rod-shaped portion extending toward the main body plate portion 811 so as to pass through the space with the main body plate portion 811, and the rod-shaped connecting portion 815a connected to the main body plate portion 811 is provided. Be prepared.

The rod-shaped connecting portion 815a has a perforated disk-shaped support portion 815a1 that supports the fastening portion 861a1 when fastening and fixing the decorative portion 861 of the left and right covers 860, and has a width dimension and a thickness dimension larger than the diameter of the support portion 815a1. Is provided with a short narrow bar portion 815a2.

The drive motor KM1 fastened and fixed to the motor support portion 816 projects a rotation shaft toward the back surface side of the main body plate portion 811, and the drive gear KG1 is fixed to the rotation shaft.

The terminal merging plate portion 817 is shaped to bend vertically downward at a position to the right of the through elongated hole 814. The terminal merging plate portion 817 has a bent shape similar to that of the terminating merging plate portion 817 with a width slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and is arranged opposite to the terminating merging plate portion 817 with the terminating merging plate portion 817. It is provided with a facing plate portion 817a forming a flow path through which a sphere can pass, and protruding ribs 817b protruding from the terminal merging plate portion 817 and the facing plate portion 817a in a rib shape at alternating positions.

In the present embodiment, in any of the production examples described later, the plurality of balls are controlled so as not to pass through the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 in a short time. Therefore, even if the sphere that has passed through the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 is configured to be guided to a single flow path, the spheres do not mesh with each other. Therefore, the flow paths on the downstream side of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 are unified. Since it can be done, the arrangement space of the flow path can be reduced.

Further, since the interval at which the ball reaches the terminal merging plate portion 817 is long, even if the flow speed of the ball is reduced by the protruding rib 817b, the trailing ball does not catch up with the preceding ball. be able to. Therefore, since the flow speed of the ball ejected from the ball staging device 800 can be decelerated, when a sensor for detecting the passage of the ball is arranged at the timing of being ejected from the ball staging device 800, the detection accuracy of the sensor is arranged. Can be secured.

The flow path constituent plate 820 includes a main body plate portion 821 formed of a plate having a size covering a groove formed by the outer wall portion 812, a fitting hole 822 formed in the main body plate portion 821, and a fitting hole 822 thereof. A circle centered on a plurality of support convex portions 823 (three in this embodiment), a fitting hole 822, and a plurality of support convex portions 823, which are projected toward the back surface at intervals below the joint hole 822. A continuous circular outer frame 824 extending to the back surface side of the main body plate portion 821 along the outer shape of a circle having a diameter larger than the outer shape of each gear constituting the transmission mechanism portion 830, and a continuous circular outer frame thereof. A wiring partition plate 825 extending in a plate shape below the outer frame 824 to move the wiring upward, an alignment convex portion 826 projecting in pairs on the front side of the main body plate portion 821, and detection sensors SC1 and SC2. Mainly includes a sensor support portion 827 arranged to face the surface, and an angle detection sensor KSC1 disposed at the upper end position of the continuous circular outer frame 824 to detect the rotation angle of the gear of the transmission mechanism portion 830.

The front side surface of the main body plate portion 821 is in contact with the extended ends of the first partition plate 813a and the second partition plate 813b in a state where the partition cylinder portion 813c and the fitting hole 822 are fitted. As a result, the open side (rear side) of the groove formed by the partition wall portion 813 is set to the main body while aligning the flow path constituent plate 820 with respect to the main body plate portion 8211 in the surface direction (direction orthogonal to the plate thickness direction). By covering with the plate portion 821, it is possible to form a flow path through which the sphere can flow.

In the articulated circular outer frame 824, the formation of a substantially left half portion of the support convex portion 823 at the lowermost end is omitted. As a result, the left half of the transmission gear DG pivotally supported by the support convex portion 823 at the lowermost end is exposed, and the exposed portion is engaged with the drive gear KG1.

The pair of alignment convex portions 826 are extended in a direction in which the contact convex portion 826a having the narrowest spacing and the lower end of the contact convex portion 826a are separated from each other by the thickness dimension of the outer wall portion 812, and the extension thereof. It is provided with a sandwiching convex portion 826b extending downward from the installation end.

The contact convex portion 826a is arranged so as to face the vicinity of the lower end portion of the intermediate frame portion 812c, and the convex tip abuts on the extended tip of the intermediate frame portion 812c.

In the sandwiching convex portion 826b, the lower surface of the extending portion in the left-right direction is arranged to face the upper end surface of the lower frame portion 812b, and the surface of the extending portion in the vertical direction on the second partition plate 813b side is the lower frame portion 812b. It is arranged to face the outer surface of the. In the present embodiment, the shape of the sandwiching convex portion 826b is set so that the facing distance between them is a minute length. Therefore, by fitting the sandwiching convex portion 826 to the lower frame portion 812b, the flow with respect to the base member 810 The alignment of the road constituent plate 820 can be easily performed. As a result, the work of assembling the flow path constituent plate 820 to the base member 810 can be efficiently performed.

The sensor support portion 827 has a shape corresponding to (complementing) the outer shape of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2, and has a misalignment prevention convex portion 827a for preventing the misalignment of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 in the opening radial direction and detection. The shape is arranged above the upper end positions of the sensors SC1 and SC2, and is formed so as to be inclined so that the convex length becomes longer as it goes downward, and the extension line in the inclination direction enters the opening of the detection sensors SC1 and SC2. It mainly includes a ball flow convex portion 827b, which is said to be.

In the present embodiment, the detection sensor SC1 is configured to perform notification that is beneficial to the player by detecting the passage of the ball, and the detection sensor SC2 detects the passage of the ball unlike the detection sensor SC1. It is configured to perform no notification at all, or to perform notification with a lower degree of benefit to the player than when the passage of the ball of the detection sensor SC1 is detected.

The angle detection sensor KSC1 is a well-known optical sensor represented by a photocoupler composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and is a detected gear SG in which light is blocked by a detected portion SGb of the detected gear SG. Determine the posture. In the state where the detected portion SGb is blocked by the angle detection sensor KSC1, the rotating disk 840 constitutes the first receiving state described later.

The transmission mechanism portion 830 is arranged at a position where the plurality of transmission gear DGs rotatably supported by the plurality of support convex portions 823 and the central axis and the rotation axis of the fitting hole 822 coincide with each other, and mesh with the transmission gear DG. The detected gear SG, the plurality of transmission gears DG, and the drive gear KG1 are covered from the back side, and the left fastening hole 831d arranged at the left end is placed on the base member 810 on the right side. The fastening hole 831c is provided with a covering plate 831 to which the fastening hole 831c is fastened and fixed to the flow path constituent plate 820, respectively.

The detected gear SG is a gear member that is non-rotatably connected to the shaft rod portion 843 of the rotating disk 840 by forming the shaft hole in a D-shaped cross section, and is a base member 810 along the rotating shaft. A tubular portion SGa extending in a cylindrical shape on the side and a detected portion SGb extending in a plate shape outward in the radial direction are provided.

The tubular portion SGa is formed with a shaft hole having a D-shaped cross section in the axial direction, and the outer peripheral diameter is slightly shorter than the inner peripheral diameter of the partition tubular portion 813c. Therefore, in a state where the tubular portion SGa is fitted to the partition cylinder portion 813c, the detected gear SG is maintained in a rotatable state and is positioned so that the rotation axis coincides with the central axis of the partition cylinder portion 813c. ..

The detected portion SGb is formed with a length that allows it to pass through the inside of the detection groove of the angle detection sensor KSC1. When the detected unit SGb passes through the inside of the detection groove of the angle detection sensor KSC1, the MPU221 can determine the posture of the detected gear SG.

The plurality of transmission gears DG are rotatably supported by the support convex portion 823, and the flow path constituent plate 820 is fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in the axially supported state to drive the lowermost transmission gear DG. The positional relationship is such that the gear KG1 can be meshed with the gear KG1.

In this case, since the member on which the transmission gear DG is supported and the member on which the drive gear KG1 is supported are different, the misalignment between the members randomly occurring during assembly causes a difference in the meshing relationship, and the transmission mechanism unit 830 It is expected that there will be a problem that it will be difficult to unify the drive resistance that occurs in.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the covering plate 831 is recessed at a position corresponding to the plurality of support convex portions 823 on the front side surface, and the recessed portion 831a is fitted to the support convex portion 823. It is provided with a support hole portion 831b formed at a position corresponding to the cylindrical portion KG1a around the axis of the drive gear KG1 and having a diameter slightly larger than the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion KG1a. As a result, the positional relationship between the support convex portion 823 on which the transmission gear DG is pivotally supported and the cylindrical portion KG1a of the drive gear KG1 can be positioned by a single member, so that the positions of the transmission gear DG and the drive gear KG1 can be positioned. The relationship can be defined within the design error of the lining plate 831.

The covering plate 831 is a through hole through which a screw is inserted when fastened to the flow path constituent plate 820, and is a right fastening hole 831c arranged at the right end portion, and a screw when fastened to the base member 810. It is provided with a left side fastening hole 831d, which is a through hole through which the material is inserted and is arranged at the left side end portion.

Here, in a state where the covering plate 831 is fastened and fixed to the flow path constituent plate 820 via the right fastening hole 831c, the flow path constituent plate is not shielded by the covering plate 831 in the rear view (the range not covered). A screw for fastening the 820 to the base member 810 is arranged. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the order of assembling the flow path constituent plate 820 and the covering plate 831 with respect to the base member 810.

For example, the flow path constituent plate 820 may be fastened and fixed to the base member 810, and then the covering plate 831 may be fastened and fixed. Further, for example, the flow path constituent plate 820 may be fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in a state where the covering plate 831 is fastened and fixed to the flow path constituent plate 820.

For example, the covering plate 831 may be fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in a state where the covering plate 831 is fastened and fixed to the flow path constituent plate 820. In this case, in the temporarily fixed state, the meshing relationship between the drive gear KG1 and the transmission gear DG can be confirmed while driving the drive motor KM1, and the flow path constituent plate 820 is attached to the base member 810. Is in a floating state (not fastened), so if there is a problem with the meshing relationship, only the fastening between the covering plate 831 and the base member 810 is released (only the screw of the left fastening hole 831d is removed). ), The transmission gear DG can be separated from the drive gear KG1 together with the flow path constituent plate 820. As a result, as compared with the case where the base member 810 and the flow path constituent plate 820 are fastened and fixed, the time required for attaching and detaching the screws can be reduced, and the time required for confirming the tooth engagement relationship can be shortened.

The rotating disk 840 has a main body portion 841,842 formed in a disk shape having a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the sphere (twice the diameter ra), and one end thereof is fixed to the center of the rotating main body portion 841,842. A metal rod-shaped shaft rod portion 843 whose end protrudes to the back side and the shaft rod portion 843 are externally fitted with a slight gap, and the outer diameter of the small diameter portion is the inner circumference of the shaft hole JH and the partition cylinder portion 813c. A cylindrical collar member 844 formed slightly shorter than the diameter, a first guide hole 845 drilled in the rotating main body portion 841,842, and a side surface of the shaft rod portion 843 side of the first guide hole 845. A second guide hole 846, which is arranged close to the shaft rod portion 843, is provided.

The shaft rod portion 843 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft hole JH of the base member 810 and the partition cylinder portion 813c in a state of being inserted through the collar member 844, and the outer shape of the other end is inside the shaft hole of the gear to be detected SG. It is formed in the same size as the shape of the side surface. As a result, the detected gear SG can be fitted to the other end of the shaft rod portion 843. In this embodiment, a fitting groove into which a commercially available E-ring can be fitted from the radial direction is formed on the outer periphery of the tip end portion on the other end side of the shaft rod portion 843. As a result, the shaft rod portion 843 can be inserted into the shaft hole JH, and the shaft rod portion 843 can be prevented from coming out of the shaft hole JH in a state where the gear to be detected SG is fitted in the shaft rod portion 843.

Since the collar member 844 has the above-mentioned shape, the misalignment of the collar member 844 with respect to the shaft hole JH and the partition cylinder portion 813c is suppressed, the shaft rod portion 843 can be aligned, and the shaft hole can be aligned. By rotating relative to the JH, the partition cylinder portion 813c, and the shaft rod portion 843, the resistance of the shaft rod portion 843 during rotation can be reduced. As a result, the driving force required for the rotation of the rotating disk 840 can be reduced, so that the degree of heat generation of the driving motor KM1 can be suppressed.

As described above, when the detected gear SG is fitted to the other end of the shaft rod portion 843, the tubular portion SGa is inserted into the partition cylinder portion 813c. That is, in the shaft rod portion 843, the side closer to the main body portion 841,842 is via the collar member 844, and the side far from the main body portion 841,842 (the other end side) is via the tubular portion SGa of the detected gear SG. Each is rotatably supported by the shaft hole JH or the partition cylinder portion 813c. As a result, the rotating disk 840 can be stably rotated while keeping the central axis of the shaft rod portion 843 aligned with the central axis of the shaft hole JH and the partition cylinder portion 813c.

The details of the configuration of the rotary disk 840 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18. FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating disk 840, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating disk 840. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the rotary disk 840 has a front main body portion in which one of the thickness directions is opened by extending a curved wall in the thickness direction so as to surround the circumference of the circular plate. It includes 841 and a back side main body 842 which is a plate-shaped member fastened and fixed from one of the front side main body 841 in the thickness direction and narrows the opening range of the front main body 841.

The front side main body portion 841 includes a disk-shaped plate-shaped portion 841a and a peripheral convex portion 841b that is axially projected along the outer shape of the guide holes 845 and 846 from the front side side surface of the plate-shaped portion 841a. , A connecting convex portion having the same convex length as the peripheral convex portion 841b, which is convex along an arc centered on the shaft rod portion 843 and is continuously formed with the peripheral convex portion 841b in the rotational direction. The 841c, the outer frame cylindrical portion 841d extending from the periphery of the plate-shaped portion 841a to the opposite side of the peripheral convex portion 841b, and the first guide hole in the same direction as the extension direction of the outer frame extending portion 841d. A first cylindrical portion 841e extending in a cylindrical shape around the 845 and a cylindrical portion extending around the second guide hole 846 in a direction parallel to the first tubular portion 841e with the same extending length. A second cylindrical portion 841f to be provided, and a shaft rod fitting portion 841 g formed from a shape that is extended with the same extension length as the second tubular portion 841f and into which the shaft rod portion 843 can be fitted. From the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 841, a pair of positioning pins 841h having a small-diameter positioning portion at both sides of a straight line passing through the shaft rod portion 843 are projected in a columnar shape, and the pair of positioning pins 841h are connected. Mainly a pair of screw-in column portions 841i, which are formed in columns on both sides of a straight line that intersects the straight line and passes through the shaft rod portion 843, and a screw hole into which a screw can be screwed is formed at the convex tip. Be prepared.

As described above, the weight of the front main body portion 841 is reduced as compared with the case where the front side main body portion 841 has a thickness corresponding to the length of the outer frame tubular portion 841d and is formed of a disk shape packed by that thickness. Can be done. As a result, the driving force required for rotation can be reduced.

The first tubular portion 841e is formed so as to be inclined so that the side surface in the lateral direction becomes wider toward the extending end portion from the plate-shaped portion 841a (see FIG. 21). As a result, the sphere that has entered the first tubular portion 841e can be smoothly discharged to the back surface side, and at the time of molding, it is easy to perform the step of removing the mold member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the first tubular portion 841e. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of product defects.

The second tubular portion 841f is a partial lid portion extended to the shaft rod portion 843 side in a manner of narrowing the opening area of the second tubular portion 841f from the extended end portion of the side wall portion on the side far from the shaft rod portion 843. It is a plate-shaped portion that connects 841f1 and the inner peripheral surface of the second tubular portion 841f and the partial lid portion 841f1. Approx. It is provided with a recessed portion 841f3 recessed from the extending base portion (plate-shaped portion 841a) side.

The second tubular portion 841f is formed so as to be inclined so that both side surfaces along the straight line TL widen toward the extending end portion. Therefore, when the sphere is arranged on the second tubular portion 841f in a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the second tubular portion 841f is along the direction of gravity, the sphere moves toward the back side along the inclination of the side surface of the second tubular portion 841f. Start rolling.

In the pair of inclined plate portions 841f2, the facing surfaces are arranged at a distance of about the radius ra of the sphere, and the end portion on the side far from the partial lid portion 841f1 is arranged at the center position in the extending direction of the second tubular portion 841f. At the same time, it projects from the side surface of the second cylindrical portion 841f on the side far from the shaft rod portion 843 along the straight line NL to the shaft rod portion 843 side by about half of the radius ra of the sphere.

The recessed portion 841f3 is centered at the center position in the longitudinal direction (straight line NL) of the opening of the second tubular portion 841f, and is evenly arranged in the longitudinal direction toward the extended end portion of the second tubular portion 841f. In the present embodiment, the recessed width is gradually expanded, and in the present embodiment, the radius of the sphere is about ra (about 5.5 [mm]) at the extended end portion, and the sphere is located near the plate-shaped portion 841a. It is about half of the radius ra of.

The convex length of the columnar portion of the positioning pin 841h is the same as the convex length of the screw-in column portion 841i, and the convex length is the extended length of the first tubular portion 841e and the second tubular portion 841f. It is shorter than that (in this embodiment, only the thickness dimension of the plate-shaped portion 842a of the back side main body portion 842).

The back surface side main body portion 842 has a disk-shaped plate-shaped portion 842a formed with a diameter of the outer peripheral surface smaller than the diameter of the inner peripheral surface of the outer frame tubular portion 841d, and a first tubular portion 841e and a second. The insertion hole 842b drilled in the plate-shaped portion 842a with an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 841f and the shaft rod fitting portion 841g, and slightly larger than the positioning portion of the positioning pin 841h at a position corresponding to the positioning pin 841h. A pair of positioning holes 842c drilled with a large diameter, a pair of screw receiving holes 842d drilled so that screws can be inserted at positions matching the threaded column portion 841i, and a regular back surface of the plate-shaped portion 842a. It is densely arranged in the plate-shaped portion 842a, and is innumerably convex from the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 842a with the same convex length, and is provided with a tapered convex portion 842e formed from a shape in which the convex tip is tapered.

The insertion hole 842b is a portion that penetrates into the gap between the first tubular portion 841e and the shaft rod fitting portion 841g, and includes an penetration portion 842b1 in which the facing distance is narrower than the other portions. The intrusion portion 842b1 acts as a portion for preventing an assembly error of the back side main body portion 842 (see FIG. 17 (c)).

The tapered convex portion 842e is a portion that reduces the frictional force generated between the tapered convex portion 842e and the main body plate portion 811 of the base member 810 that is arranged so as to face each other. That is, since the tapered convex portion 842e is formed from the innumerable tapered convex portions, the contact between the back surface side surface of the rotary disk 840 and the front surface side surface of the base member 810 becomes point contact. Since the number of voids at the time of contact increases, the generated frictional force can be reduced. Thereby, the operating resistance due to the contact of the rotating disk 840 with the base member 810 can be reduced.

17 (a) is a front view of the rotary disk 840, and FIG. 17 (b) is a sectional view of the rotary disk 840 in the line XVIIb-XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a), FIG. 17 (c). Is a rear view of the rotary disk 840, and FIG. 18 is a schematic front view of the rotary disk 840 from which only the outer shape of the rotary disk 840 is extracted. Note that FIG. 18 shows the outer shape of each guide hole 845,846 at the front end.

As shown in FIG. 17B, the back side main body portion 842 is arranged on the back side of the front side main body portion 841 on the back side end surface. As a result, in the assembled state (see FIG. 9), the back side main body portion 842 can be arranged between the main body plate portion 811 of the base member 810 and the front side main body portion 841, so that the back side main body portion 842 comes into contact with the main body plate portion 811. The location can be limited to the back side main body portion 842.

Further, a gap VA is continuously formed in a ring shape between the outer frame cylindrical portion 841d and the outer peripheral end of the back surface side main body portion 842. That is, the space INNE between the front main body portion 841 and the back side main body portion 842 and the outer space OUT are continuously connected through the ring-shaped gap VA.

Therefore, by creating an air flow, it is possible to exchange air in the space INNE and the space OUTE, and to discharge the air from one space to the other space. In the present embodiment, since the ring-shaped gap VA is formed on the back side of the front side main body portion 841, when air is discharged from the space INE, it is discharged exclusively to the back side of the front side main body portion 841. be able to. In the present embodiment, the substrate 862 is arranged on the back side of the front side main body portion 841, and the space between the front side main body portion 841 and the substrate 862 is not partitioned (between the main body plate portion 811 and the separation frame plate 815). Since it is connected in space), the air discharged from the space INNE can be applied to the substrate 862. As a result, the electronic components arranged on the substrate 862 can be cooled.

As shown in FIG. 17C, the insertion hole 842b of the back side main body portion 842 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the collar member 844. Therefore, the back side main body portion 842 can be attached to and detached from the front side main body portion 841 regardless of the presence or absence of the collar member 844.

<About posture adjustment>
A method of adjusting the posture when assembling the back side main body portion 842 to the front side main body portion 841 will be described. Since the back side main body portion 842 is fastened and fixed to the front side main body portion 841 in a state where the invading portion 842b1 has invaded the gap between the first tubular portion 841e and the shaft rod fitting portion 841g, it is the first in the assembly work. In addition, the intrusion portion 842b1 is arranged in the gap between the first cylindrical portion 841e and the shaft rod fitting portion 841g in a state where the central portion of the insertion hole 842b is aligned with the fitting shaft rod portion 841g.

In this state, if the front and back of the back side main body portion 842 are correct, the positions of the positioning hole 842b and the positioning pin 841h match, and the positions of the screw-in pillar portion 841i and the screw receiving hole 842d match, and the back surface. The side main body portion 842 can be fastened and fixed to the front side main body portion 841.

On the other hand, if the front and back of the back side main body portion 842 are reversed, the positions of the positioning hole 842b and the positioning pin 841h do not match, and the positions of the screwed column portion 841i and the screw receiving hole 842d do not match. It is possible to make the operator notice that the front and back sides of the back side main body portion 842 are reversed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the assembling work from being continued with the front and back sides of the back side main body portion 842 reversed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the posture of the rear side main body portion 842 can be quickly adjusted by matching the arrangement of the intrusion portion 842b1, and the positioning pin 841h, the screw-in pillar portion 841i, the positioning hole 842c, and the screw receiving hole 842d can be quickly adjusted. Since it can be fastened and fixed only when the positional relationship with is correct, it is possible to prevent an assembly error in which the front and back sides are reversed. This makes it possible to improve the work efficiency of the assembly work.

As shown in FIG. 18, the first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 are different in arrangement and shape with respect to the shaft rod portion 843. The maximum length (longitudinal width) of the first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 in the longitudinal direction (direction of the straight line NL) is set to be the same. Hereinafter, the arrangement of the first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 will be described in detail.

The first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 have the same common straight line TL passing through the central axis of the shaft rod portion 843 and the lateral direction, and the straight line NL orthogonal to the straight line TL and the longitudinal direction. Is a long hole-shaped through hole that is the same. That is, the first guide hole 845 and the second guide hole 846 are arranged so as to be parallel in the longitudinal direction, and the straight line TL is arranged at the center position in the longitudinal direction.

The first guide hole 845 has a length R1 between the shaft rod portion 843 and the inner surface on the side closer to the shaft rod portion 843 (distance at the shortest position), and is far from the shaft rod portion 843 and the shaft rod portion 843. The distance from the inner surface of the side is set to the length R2, respectively.

The second guide hole 846 has a length R3 in which the distance (distance at the shortest position) between the shaft rod portion 843 and the inner surface on the side closer to the shaft rod portion 843 is shorter than the length R1 (R3 <R1). The distance between the shaft rod portion 843 and the inner surface on the side far from the shaft rod portion 843 is set to the length R4, and the distance between the shaft rod portion 843 and the extended tip of the partial lid portion 841f1 is set to the length R5. (R3 <R5 <R4).

A description will be given by returning from FIG. 12 to FIG. The front cover 850 is arranged on the front side of the rotating disk 840, and is extended below the shielding plate portion 851 that covers about two-thirds of the vertical dimension of the rotating main body portion 841 and the shielding plate portion 851. The sensor support portion 852 that covers the through elongated holes 814 to prevent the detection sensors SC1 and SC2 from coming off, and the shielding plate portion 851 and the base member 810 are extended in a plate shape from the back surface side of the shielding plate portion 851 toward the base member 810. It is provided with a connecting plate portion 853 for connecting the above.

The shielding plate portion 851 is made of a light-transmitting resin material so that the rotating disc 840 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized from the front side, and the left and right side surfaces follow the outer shape of the rotating main body portion 841. It is said to be a shape. This makes it possible to easily associate the decoration of the shielding plate portion 851 with the decoration of the rotating main body portion 841.

The shielding plate portion 851 includes a recessed support portion 851a that is recessed downward about a straight line that passes through the shaft rod portion 842 and faces in the vertical direction. The recessed support portion 851a positions the inclined portion 871 of the rolling flow path portion 870, which will be described later.

The surface of the connecting plate portion 853 on the side facing the rotating main body portion 841 is curved along the arc shape of the rotating main body portion 841.

The left and right covers 860 include a pair of left and right decorative portions 861 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810, and a pair of left and right substrates 862 that are fastened and fixed to the back side of the base member 810.

The decorative portion 861 is a decorative plate portion 861a which is a plate-shaped portion extending along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 842, and the decorative plate portion 861a from the side surface on the side far from the shaft rod portion 842 to the back side. The outer frame plate 861b that is extended in a plate shape and abuts on the separation frame plate 815, and the shield plate portion that is extended in a plate shape from the side surface of the decorative plate 861a close to the shaft rod portion 842 toward the back side. It is provided with an inner frame plate 861c slightly overhanging on the back surface side of the 851.

The decorative plate portion 861a is screwed into the fastening portion 861a1 as one of the portions for screwing the screws inserted into the base member 810 and into the fastening holes arranged at the rear end of the rolling flow path portion 870. It is provided with a through hole 861a2 through which a screw rod portion of a screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted and a head is locked. That is, in the fastening portion 861a1, the screw inserted into the support portion 815a1 is screwed into the fastening portion to be fastened and fixed, and the screw is fastened and fixed to the rolling flow path portion 870 with the through hole 861a2 interposed therebetween.

The inner side surface of the inner frame plate 861c facing the shielding plate portion 851 has an arc shape having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shielding plate portion 851. As a result, even if the shielding plate portion 851 is about to be displaced, the displacement can be regulated by the inner frame plate 861c. Therefore, the shielding plate portion 851 can be formed of a thin member.

According to this configuration, the inner frame plate 861b is arranged only on the front side of the rotating main body portion 841 and does not project to a position where it is arranged facing the outer circumference.

The substrate 862 is arranged at a position that prevents access to the support portion 815a1 from the back surface side in a fastened and fixed state (see FIG. 12). Therefore, since the structure is such that the fastening of the decorative portion 861 cannot be released without removing the substrate 862, it is possible to prevent the decorative portion 861 from being illegally removed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the rolling flow path portion 870 fixed to the decorative portion 861 from changing, and thus it is possible to prevent the detection sensor SC1 from illegally passing the ball.

The lower end of the rolling flow path portion 870 is placed on the recessed support portion 851a and is formed as a plate-shaped portion having an inverted C-shaped cross section (see FIG. 13), and the upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward the back surface side. An inclined portion 871, a downward extending portion 872 extending downward with a dimension larger than the recessed support portion 851a at the tip portion of the inclined portion 871, and a rolling flow path portion 870 on the left side of the inclined portion 871. A triangular plate-shaped tilt prevention portion 873 that projects to the front side at the bottom surface and surface position, and an L-shaped ball rolling path that bends from the left-right direction to the front-back direction at the tilted portion 871. It is provided with a forming portion 874.

In the present embodiment, the rolling path forming portion 874 is designed so that the time required for the received ball to reach the inclined portion 871 after passing through the communication opening 654 is less than one second.

The arrangement of the front cover 850, the left and right covers 860, and the rolling flow path portion 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (a) is a top view of the ball staging device 800, FIG. 19 (b) is a partial front view of the ball staging device 800, and FIG. 19 (c) is the XIXc- of FIG. 19 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the sphere staging apparatus 800 in the XIXc line.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the rolling flow path portion 870 is arranged at a position where the back side end portion of the inclined portion 871 is slightly spaced from the front side end portion of the rotating disk 840. .. That is, the through hole 861a2 of the decorative portion 861 is arranged so that the rear end portion of the inclined portion 871 of the rolling flow path portion 870 does not abut on the front side end portion of the rotating disk 840 by fastening and fixing. The front-back position is set. This makes it possible to prevent the rotary disk 840 and the rolling flow path portion 870 from coming into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the upper end surface of the shielding plate portion 851 of the front cover 850 is designed to have a shape that matches (contacts with the surface) the shape of the lower end surface of the rolling flow path portion 870. Therefore, the rolling prevention portion 873 and the upper end surface of the shielding plate portion 851 come into contact with each other on the surface. By this contact, it is possible to prevent the rolling flow path portion 870 from being displaced in the forward tilting direction due to the weight of the sphere or the like.

As shown in FIG. 19C, in the present embodiment, the vertical position of the inclined portion 871 is defined by the recessed support portion 851a as the alignment of the rolling flow path portion 870, and the downward extending portion 872 is a shielding plate. Since the positional relationship is such that the back surface of the portion 851 can be in contact with the back surface, it is possible to prevent the rolling flow path portion 870 from being displaced in the rising direction during assembly.

That is, the rolling flow path portion 870 can be prevented from being displaced in the forward tilting direction and being displaced in the rising direction due to the contact with the shielding plate portion 851, and thus the posture of the rolling flow path portion 870. Since the stability of the rolling flow path portion 870 can be improved, the positional relationship between the rolling flow path portion 870 and the rotating disk 840 can be maintained for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the rolling flow path portion 870 and the rotating disk 840 from changing, which hinders the production.

Next, the change in the state of the ball effect device 800 will be described. As described above, in the ball effect device 800 of the present embodiment, the rotary disk 840 that rotates by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 is on the ball passage path (rolling) between the base member 810 and the rolling flow path portion 870. It is arranged on a straight line connecting the inclined portion 871 as the end of the flow path forming portion 874 and the first through hole KH1 for receiving the sphere in the base member 810 (see FIG. 23).

Here, by setting the posture of the rotating disk 840, the rotating disk is formed on a straight line connecting the inclined portion 871 as the end of the rolling path forming portion 874 and the first through hole KH1 for receiving the sphere in the base member 810. When the first guide hole 845 of the 840 is arranged (first receiving state), when the second guide hole 846 of the rotary disk 840 is arranged (second receiving state), the first guide hole 845 is also the first. 2 It is possible to form a case where the guide hole 846 is not arranged (receipt prevention state). These will be described in order.

The first receiving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. 20 is a front view of the ball staging device 800 in the first receiving state, and FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the ball staging device 800 in the XXI-XXI line of FIG. 20. In FIG. 20, the front cover 850 and the rolling flow path portion 870 are omitted for ease of understanding, and the patterns of the peripheral convex portion 841b, the connecting convex portion 841c, and the left and right cover 860 are omitted. Only the outer shape of the inclined portion 871 is shown, and the outer shapes of the first through hole KH1 and the second through hole KH2 are shown by an imaginary line (two-dot chain line). In FIG. 20, the outer shape of the sphere immediately before being placed on the inclined portion 871 and guided to the rotating disk 840 is shown as a reference.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first receiving state, the sphere supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870 and reaching the inclined portion 871 flows down along the inclination of the inclined portion 871 and reaches the first guide hole 845. You will be guided. Here, the vertical length Rh of the first through hole KH1 and the shaft rod portion 843 is the length between the shaft side wall portion and the shaft rod portion 843 at the extended end portion of the first tubular portion 841e. It is set shorter than R1a (R1> R1a) (R1a> Rh). Therefore, the ball guided to the first guide hole 845 passes through the first tubular portion 841e, flows into the first through hole KH1, rolls the first partition plate 813a, and then right of the second partition plate 813b. It passes through one region (see FIG. 13) and passes through the detection sensor SC1 (see FIG. 9) disposed in the through slot 814 in the assembled state. That is, in the first receiving state, as long as the ball is supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870, the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1.

The second receiving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. 22 is a front view of the ball staging device 800 in the second receiving state, and FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the ball staging device 800 in the line XXIII-XXIII of FIG. 22. In FIG. 22, the front cover 850 and the rolling flow path portion 870 are omitted for ease of understanding, and the patterns of the peripheral convex portion 841b, the connecting convex portion 841c, and the left and right cover 860 are omitted. Only the outer shape of the inclined portion 871 is shown, and the outer shapes of the first through hole KH1 and the second through hole KH2 are shown by an imaginary line (two-dot chain line). Further, as shown in FIG. 22, in the second receiving state, the center position in the width direction of the inclined portion 871 (the lower end position of the inverted C shape) is the axial direction of the shaft rod portion 843 and the shaft rod portions 843 and the second. It is arranged on a plane SQ1 (see FIG. 17) formed by a linear direction connecting the central positions of the tubular portion 841f in the longitudinal direction. In FIG. 22, the outer shape of the sphere immediately before being placed on the inclined portion 871 and guided to the rotating disk 840 is shown as a reference.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the second receiving state, the sphere supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870 and reaching the inclined portion 871 flows down along the inclination of the inclined portion 871 and reaches the second guide hole 846. You will be guided. Here, the vertical length Rh of the first through hole KH1 and the shaft rod portion 843 is set to have a dimension slightly longer than the length R3 (Rh ≧ R3). Further, by arranging the recessed portion 841f3 on the lower surface of the passage path of the sphere in the second tubular portion 841f, the lower end portion of the sphere that rolls on the second tubular portion 841f enters the inside of the recessed portion 841f3. Therefore, the lower end position of the sphere is arranged below the lower surface of the second guide hole 846. Therefore, the ball guided to the second guide hole 846 enters the inside of the recessed portion 841f3 before passing through the second tubular portion 841f, and stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1. That is, in the second receiving state, even when a ball is supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870, the ball is on the front side of the first through hole KH1 before passing through the detection sensor SC1 (see FIG. 9). Stay at.

The ball staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 passes through the first through hole KH1 by being subsequently pushed out by the ball supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870. This will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

24 (a) to 24 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the rolling flow path portion 870, the second tubular portion 841f, and the first through hole KH1 in the XXIII-XXIII line of FIG. 22. In addition, in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c), the spheres P11 and P12 supplied to the rolling flow path portion 870 are shown. That is, in FIG. 24A, the state in which the sphere P11 is retained on the front side of the first through hole KH1, and in FIG. 24B, the state in which the sphere P12 collides with the sphere P11 from the front side is shown in FIG. 24. In (c), the state in which the sphere P11 is extruded by the sphere P12 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the recessed width of the recessed portion 841f3 at the extended end of the second tubular portion 841f3 is set to be about the same as the radius ra of the sphere, so that the lower end portion of the sphere P11 is the upper surface of the recessed portion 841f3. It stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1 in a state where it enters downward from the bottom by about half the length of the radius ra of the sphere. That is, the sphere P11 stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1 in a state where the center of the sphere P11 is arranged above the lower end of the first through hole KH1 (see FIG. 24 (a)).

When the sphere P12 flows down toward the sphere P11 with the sphere P11 staying, the sphere P12 flows down along the inclination with the center of the sphere aligned with the center in the width direction (on the plane SQ1) of the inclined portion 871. On the other hand, since the sphere P11 stays in the recessed portion 841f3, the center of the recessed portion 841f3 in the width direction and the center of the sphere coincide with each other in the width direction of the recessed portion 841f3. The center of the sphere is also arranged on the plane SQ1 like the sphere P12. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the center position of the sphere P11 and the sphere P12 is set in FIG. 24 by controlling the center position of the inclined portion 871 in the width direction to be arranged on the plane SQ1 in the second receiving state. It can be maintained on the plane SQ1 from (a) to FIG. 24 (b). Therefore, the load applied from the sphere P12 to the sphere P11 can be made to act on the plane SQ1 and can be suppressed from deviating in the left-right direction (direction orthogonal to the plane SQ1).

The load from the sphere P12 causes the sphere P11 to be loaded by maintaining the center positions of the sphere P11 and the sphere P12 on the plane SQ1 and arranging the center of the sphere P11 above the lower end of the first through hole KH1. It can be efficiently used as a propulsive force for pushing out to the back side, and the ball P11 can flow into the first through hole KH1. After pushing out the sphere P11, the sphere P12 stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1 (replaces the sphere P11).

The receipt prevention state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. 25 and 26 are front views of the ball staging device 800 in an example of the reception prevention state. In FIGS. 25 and 26, the front cover 850 and the rolling flow path portion 870 are omitted for ease of understanding, and the patterns of the peripheral convex portion 841b, the connecting convex portion 841c, and the left and right cover 860 are shown. Omitted, only the outer shape of the inclined portion 871 is shown, and the outer shapes of the first through hole KH1 and the second through hole KH2 are shown by an imaginary line (two-dot chain line).

In FIG. 25, a state in which the rotating disk 840 is rotated by about 60 ° in the rotation direction CW in the front view clockwise from the second receiving state (see FIG. 22) is shown, and in FIG. 26, from the state shown in FIG. 25. The state in which the rotary disk 840 is rotated by about 180 ° in the rotation direction CW is shown.

Here, when the rotary disk 840 rotates in the rotation direction CW while the sphere P11 illustrated in FIG. 24 stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1, the second guide hole 846 is the lower end of the first through hole KH1. The sphere P11 also moves below the lower end of the first through hole KH1 as it moves downward, and the sphere P11 cannot pass through the first through hole KH1. That is, during the movement of the rotating disk 840, the sphere P11 is maintained inside the second cylindrical portion 841f formed on the back surface side of the second guide hole 846 (see FIG. 25). The sphere P11 is maintained in the second tubular portion 841f until the first through hole KH1 or the second through hole KH2 is arranged again on the back surface side of the second guide hole 846.

In FIG. 26, the second through hole KH2 is arranged on the back surface side of the second guide hole 846, but the partial lid portion 841f1 is arranged on the path through which the sphere P11 flows down, and the sphere P11 is arranged by the partial lid portion 841f1. Is regulated to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 26, the arc portion on the side far from the shaft rod portion 843 of the second through hole KH2 is centered on the shaft rod portion 843 whose distance from the shaft rod portion 843 is the same as the length R5. It is formed in the shape of an arc.

Therefore, when the rotary disk 840 rotates about 30 ° in the rotation direction CW from the state shown in FIG. 26, the partial lid portion 841f1 is arranged on the left side of the second through hole KH2 and deviates from the flow path of the ball P11 ( (Out of the area diagonally below the back side of the sphere P11). Therefore, the sphere P11 can flow down to the back surface side along the inclination of the second tubular portion 841f and pass through the second through hole KH2 without being restricted by the partial lid portion 841f1. In this case, the inclination of the inclined plate portion 841f2 functions as a guide portion for moving the sphere P11 toward the second through hole KH2 when the sphere P11 is displaced to the left. Here, the relative movement performed by the sphere P11 maintained inside the second cylindrical portion 841f that is displaced (changes in posture and position) with the rotation of the rotating disk 840 will be described.

27 is a front perspective view of the second tubular portion 841f, and FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (c) are front views of the second tubular portion 841f showing a change in posture of the second tubular portion 841f. Is. In addition, in FIGS. 27 and 28 (a) to 28 (c), the movement of the sphere P11 maintained in the second cylindrical portion 841f is shown. Further, in FIG. 27, a portion where the line of sight is blocked by the plate-shaped portion 841a is shown by a hidden line, and a portion where the line of sight is not blocked by the plate-shaped portion 841a is shown by a solid line.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 (a), in a state where the sphere P11 is arranged between the pair of inclined plate portions 841f2, the sphere P11 is partially inside the pair of inclined plate portions 841f2 (between facing surfaces). It is supported in a state of being intruded.

From the state shown in FIG. 28 (a), as the rotating disk 840 is rotated in the rotation direction CW, the sphere P11 causes one inclined plate portion 841f2 on the lower side (right side in FIG. 28 (b)). While moving over the second tubular portion 841f, the center position of the sphere P11 is arranged below the inclined plate portion 841f2 in a state where the longitudinal direction of the opening of the second tubular portion 841f is along the vertical direction. (See FIG. 28 (c)).

Here, when the sphere P11 gets over the inclined plate portion 841f2, the sphere P11 is urged to the front side because a load toward the front side is applied to the sphere P11 from the inclined plate portion 841f2 due to the inclination thereof. Therefore, even if the second guide hole 846 and the second through hole KH2 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction during the displacement from FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (c) (see FIG. 26), the sphere P11 is inclined. Sufficient speed for the second guide hole 846 to pass through the second through hole KH2 while being urged to the front side by the plate portion 841f2 (maintenance speed SV, speed of half rotation in one second in this embodiment). When the rotary disk 840 rotates in, the rotary disk 840 is rotated in the rotation direction CW from FIG. 26 while the sphere P11 is maintained in the second tubular portion 841f, and returns to the second receiving state (see FIG. 22). It becomes possible.

That is, depending on whether the rotating disk 840 rotates at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV or at a speed higher than the maintenance speed SV, whether the sphere P11 is discharged from the state of FIG. 26 through the second through hole KH2. It is possible to switch whether the sphere P11 returns to the second receiving state while being maintained by the second tubular portion 841f. In the present embodiment, as the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840, a speed of a plurality of stages larger than the maintenance speed SV and a speed less than the maintenance speed SV (discharge speed MDV) are prepared.

In FIG. 28, as an example, the case where the sphere P11 moves from between the pair of inclined plate portions 841f2 has been described, but in this case, the sphere P11 is urged from the inclined plate portion 841f2 toward the front side. It is not limited to. For example, when returning from the state shown in FIG. 28 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 28 (a) via FIG. 28 (b) (when the rotating disk 840 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction CW), The ball P11 is urged toward the front side from the inclined plate portion 841f2. That is, in a state where the inclined plate portion 841f2 is arranged below the center position of the sphere P11, when the sphere P11 gets over the inclined plate portion 841f2, the sphere P11 is on the front side from the inclined plate portion 841f2 regardless of the direction. Be urged towards.

When the sphere P11 returns to the second receiving state while being maintained by the second tubular portion 841f, the sphere P11 swings in the longitudinal direction of the second tubular portion 841f (the second tubular portion 841f of the sphere P11). However, in the present embodiment, the ball enters (catch) and is decelerated by the recessed portion 841f3 arranged at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the second cylindrical portion 841f. , The sphere P11 can be arranged in the recessed portion 841f3 in a short period of time.

In the second receiving state (see FIGS. 22 to 24), the second guide hole 846 is arranged on the uppermost side with respect to the first through hole KH1. That is, as the rotary disk 840 rotates from the second receiving state, the second guide hole 846 is arranged below the second receiving state, so that the ball staying in the second guide hole 846 rotates. It is possible to prevent the disk 840 from flowing down (performing irregular flow) through the first through hole KH1 during rotation.

<Direction 1. Prevent technical intervention by single shot. Keep hitting to prevent over-winning>
An example of an effect using the ball effect device 800 (first effect example) will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. 29 and 30 show an example of the time change of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a in the first operation pattern and the time change of the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 in the first effect example. It is a figure which showed an example.

In addition, in FIG. 29, an example of the case where the big hit game is performed without stopping the ball, and in FIG. 30, the case where the big hit game is performed over a longer time than in FIG. 29 while appropriately stopping the ball. An example (as an example, when the time of the round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds) of the operating time T1) is shown. The scales of the widths of FIGS. 29 and 30 are reference scales and are not exact.

Further, in FIGS. 29 and 30, it is illustrated that the case where the rotary disk 840 is maintained in the first receiving state and the case where the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the second receiving state can be switched. In this case, the term "maintained" is not limited to the case where the rotary disk 840 is stopped. For example, the rotary disk 840 rotates in a short time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) and returns to the same state again. Including the case of returning.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, the two circles marked along with the timed change of the ball effecting device 800 indicate how many balls stay on the front side of the through holes KH1 and KH2. In FIGS. 29 and 30, a circle indicating the state after the change is shown at the time when the number of stays changes. In the following drawings, the meanings of the two circles written together with the time change of the ball staging device 800 are the same.

For example, if both of the two circles are white circles, the number of staying spheres is 0, and if one circle is a white circle and the remaining one circle is a black circle, the number of staying spheres is 0. It is shown that the number of spheres is one, and that if the two circles are both black circles, the number of spheres to stay is two. As described above, if two balls are retained when the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 is in the second receiving state, the previously retained balls are pushed out, pass through the first through hole KH1, and are detected. Since it is detected by the sensor SC1, in this production example, immediately after the two circles become black circles, a sphere is detected by the detection sensor SC1 and one circle changes to a white circle.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the rotary disk 840, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot A, the MPU 201 drives and controls the large opening solenoid so that the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 operate based on the first operation pattern. The MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 drives and controls the drive motor KM1 so that the rotary disk 840 operates based on the first effect example.

In the MPU 201, when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the timer means (not shown) has the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to hold the opening / closing plate 651 in the closed state (closed state), and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the large opening solenoid is opened so that the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means and the opening / closing plate 651 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 650a. Is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 651 operates for a long time.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 651 is displaced to the closed state and the large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to close the second specified winning opening 650a, and the first round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 651 of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to be held in the closed state (closed state), and the second round game R is started after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

Further, when the operating time TSa, which is a sufficient time (35 seconds in the present embodiment) for the operating time T1 of the first round round game R to elapse, has elapsed from the start of the first round round game R, it is stored. The plate 657 is switched from the regulated state to the allowable state for several seconds (a sufficient time for the ball to pass, 0.5 seconds in this embodiment), and then the solenoid for the storage plate is driven and controlled so as to return to the regulated state. As a result, among the balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 650a in the first round game R, the balls that have come into contact with the right side of the storage plate 657 and have stagnated are guided to the communication opening 654.

The MPU 221 has an operating time TSS (14 seconds in this embodiment) shorter than the time elapsed from the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect) to the end of the first round game R in the shortest time. Occasionally, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled so that the rotary disk 840 is switched from the first receiving state to the second receiving state and held in the second receiving state. Therefore, after the end of the first round game R, the ball that has flowed down through the communication opening 654 is received by the second guide hole 846 and stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1.

In this production example, the first guide hole 845 is arranged on the front side of the first through hole KH1 for about 4 seconds from the start of the first round game R, and the first through hole is formed by one ball. Since it is in a state where it can pass through KH1, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to rapidly advance the first round game R.

In the second round, the MPU 201 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and closes the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 (similar to the start of the first round). The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to displace from the closed state) to the open state (open state) to open the first specific winning opening 65a, so that the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 operates for a long time. ..

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is displaced to the closed state (closed state) to close the first specific winning opening 65a, and the second round round game R ends. .. The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set to 2 seconds.

After that, similarly, the third to ninth round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to be displaced between the (closed state) and the open state (open state) and open / close the first specific winning opening 65a.

In the 10th round, as in the start of the 1st round, the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is closed (closed state). ) Is displaced from the open state (open state) to open the second specific winning opening 650a by driving and controlling the large opening opening solenoid to cause the opening / closing plate 651 to operate for a long time.

Further, when the operating time TSa, which is a sufficient time (35 seconds in the present embodiment) for the operating time T1 of the 10th round round game R to elapse, has elapsed from the start of the 10th round round game R, it is stored. The plate 657 is switched from the regulated state to the allowable state for several seconds (a sufficient time for the ball to pass, 0.5 seconds in this embodiment), and then the solenoid for the storage plate is driven and controlled so as to return to the regulated state. As a result, among the balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 650a in the 10th round round game R, the balls that have come into contact with the right side of the storage plate 657 and have stagnated are guided to the communication opening 654.

The MPU221 is the time elapsed from the end of the 10th round game R in FIG. 29 until the ball passing through the communication opening 654 reaches the inclined portion 871 (up to the 9th round as shown in FIG. 29). , 122 seconds, which is the time when 6 seconds (8 seconds in total with the first interval time Int1 between rounds) is required for each round game R, and the 10th round game R in FIG. Time until the ball passing through the communication opening 654 reaches the inclined portion 871 after the end of the above (as shown in FIG. 30, until the 9th round, 30 seconds in the round game R of each round (round). The specified time TEc (200 seconds in this embodiment), which is the time between the first interval time (32 seconds in total with Int1) and the time (288 seconds), is the special figure variation display (design). When a lapse of time from the end of the variation effect), the rotary disk 840 is rotated once at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV, and then the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled so as to be held in the second receiving state.

Therefore, if the timing at which the ball passes through the communication opening 654 and flows down after the end of the 10th round round game R is before the specified time TEc has elapsed from the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect), that The ball can be made to collide with the ball staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 after the round game R of the first round, and the previously staying ball is made to flow to the back side of the first through hole KH1. , The sphere can be detected by the detection sensor SC1 (see FIG. 24).

On the other hand, if the timing at which the ball passes through the communication opening 654 and flows down after the end of the 10th round round game R is after the specified time TEc has elapsed from the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). The ball that has accumulated on the front side of the first through hole KH1 after the first round game R is discharged from the second through hole KH2 in advance and is detected by the detection sensor SC2 (see FIG. 26).

Therefore, the ball that flows down through the communication opening 654 after the end of the 10th round game R is received by the empty second guide hole 846 and stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1. Therefore, since the sphere does not pass through the first through hole KH1, the sphere is not detected by the detection sensor SC1, and as will be described later, this sphere is detected by the detection sensor SC2.

After that, in the MPU 201, as in the second to ninth rounds, the eleventh round to the fifteenth round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs. Then, the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is displaced between the closed state (closed state) and the open state (open state), and the large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to open / close the first specific winning opening 65a. ..

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the 15th round round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is displaced to the closed state (closed state) to close the first specific winning opening 65a, and the 15th round round game R is completed. ..

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

The MPU221 rotates the rotary disk 840 once at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R in the 15th round, and then the drive motor KM1 so as to hold the rotary disk 840 in the first receiving state. Is driven and controlled. As a result, after the end of the 10th round game R, the ball staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 is discharged through the second through hole KH2, and the ball is detected by the detection sensor SC2.

According to this operation pattern, whether or not the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1 depending on whether the timing at which the ball is guided to the rotating disk 840 after the 10th round game R is before or after the specified time TEc. Can be changed.

That is, the ball can be passed through the detection sensor SC1 if it is before the specified time TEc. Therefore, due to the ball passing through the detection sensor SC1, a notification related to the interest of the player (for example, a notification of whether or not the current gaming state is a probabilistic state (notification of whether or not it is a latent probable change)). ) And notification of round promotion), it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to proceed with the round game quickly.

The mode of notification is not limited in any way, and for example, a specific voice (for example, "next is probable", "next is normal", etc.) may be output from the voice output device 226. However, the lamp display device 227 emits light in a specific light emitting mode (for example, emitting light in rainbow colors as an indicator of latent probability change, or raising the expectation that the latent probability changes in the order of blue, green, or red). It may be a mode in which the lighting units 29 to 33 issue the lamp. Further, the display of the jackpot symbol in the third symbol display device 81 may be changed to an advantageous symbol (for example, a display symbol of the jackpot A which is more advantageous than the display symbol of the jackpot C) (promotion effect).

As a result, it is possible to suppress a single hit during the jackpot game. In the single shot, the number of balls is one less than the specified number in order to aim for the winning of the number of balls exceeding the specified number (for example, 10) scheduled to be won in the specific winning openings 65a, 650a in the round game R. Is a method of striking to form a winning state. The round game R of each round utilizes the fact that it continues for 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1, until a specified number of balls are won, and the time is fully used to make a single shot. The person who hits adjusts the number of winnings. With a number of balls that are one less than the specified number, the number of balls that exceeds the specified number can be won by firing the balls with the aim of having multiple balls collectively win the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. You can expect it.

On the other hand, there is a tendency for a difference in the number of payouts in the jackpot game between a player who makes a single hit and a player who does not make a single hit (if the number of winnings is different from the specified number by one, the difference is 15 and 1 in all rounds. If the pieces are different, 150 pieces (the number of balls equivalent to 600 yen in a game in which one ball is purchased for 4 yen)), in order to stabilize the profit that the player can obtain by the jackpot game (player's) Regardless of experience points, it is desirable to regulate single-shot hits (in order to construct a gaming machine in which players can enjoy profits fairly). For example, depending on the game store, the clerk may alert the player who makes a single shot and stop the single shot, but in many cases the clerk's eyes are stolen and the single shot is made, so the effect is partial. It stayed in the thing.

On the other hand, according to this production example, the shorter the time required for the round game R to progress up to the 10th round, the easier it is for the ball to pass through the detection sensor SC1, and the ball uses the detection sensor SC1. Controlled to provide notifications related to the player's interests due to passage. As described above, in the case of single-shot hitting, it becomes difficult to pass the ball through the detection sensor SC1 because the time required for adjusting the number of winnings in the round game R of each round becomes long. Therefore, the notification related to the player's profit generated by the ball passing through the detection sensor SC1 is attractive to the player (for example, in a production mode in which it is difficult to understand that the game state has changed to the probabilistic state). If it is possible to determine the transition to the probable change state by the notification related to the profit of the player, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game can be determined to increase, etc.), the player is made to stop the single hit and each round. It is possible to improve the motivation to advance the round game R of the eyes quickly (unleashed).

The timing of notification caused by passing through the detection sensor SC1 can be arbitrarily set. For example, the notification may be performed immediately after the sphere is detected by the detection sensor SC1. In this case, since the jackpot game R is still in progress after the notification, the jackpot game R in the remaining rounds can be performed without rushing, so that after completing one set of jackpot games in 15 rounds, the game is continued. You can calmly proceed with the game you play.

Further, for example, the notification may be performed during the lapse of the ending time ED (after the lapse of time after the sphere is detected by the detection sensor SC1). In this case, since the content of the notification caused by passing through the detection sensor SC1 is undecided during the jackpot game, the player's attention to the notification can be maintained high until the end of the jackpot game.

Further, for example, it may be after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 5 minutes have elapsed) after the jackpot game is completed. In this case, the game can be continued while expecting the content of the notification for a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the player can grasp whether the situation is advantageous or unfavorable for the player (notification of whether or not it is in a probable change state), so that the player can feel at ease. You can choose whether or not to continue the game after that.

In this production example, the first guide hole 845 is arranged on the front side of the first through hole KH1 for about 4 seconds from the start of the first round game R, and the first through hole is formed by one ball. Since it is in a state where it can pass through KH1, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to rapidly advance the first round game R.

In this operation pattern, the round game R (the second variable winning device 650 is opened in this operation pattern) in which the ball flows down toward the rotating disk 840, and the round game R (the first in this operation pattern) immediately after that. The variable winning device 65 is released), and the variable winning devices 65 and 650 to be opened are switched. As a result, at the timing when the first ball is guided to the rotating disk 840, the player's line of sight is guided to the first variable winning device 65, so that the first ball is guided to the rotating disk 840. It is possible to easily prevent the player's line of sight from turning toward the rotating disk 840 at the timing. This makes it difficult for the player to know which of the guide holes 845 and 846 of the rotating disk 840 the ball has entered.

For example, a player who does not know which of the guide holes 845 and 846 of the rotating disk 840 the first ball has entered, the first ball stays on the front side of the rotating disk 840. Since it is not possible to know whether the sphere has passed through the first through hole KH1 or the second through hole KH2 by looking only at the situation where the sphere has not passed (because it is not known whether the sphere has passed through the detection sensor SC1). ), After it is determined that the second ball does not pass through the first through hole KH1, notification is performed based on the fact that the first ball has passed through the detection sensor SC1 (so-called "revival effect"). By doing), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Since it is desirable that the player's line of sight can be guided to the rotating disk 840 at the timing when the second ball is guided to the rotating disk 840, the opening round of the second variable winning device 650 is the tenth round. It may be the 15th round (final round) instead of. This makes it possible to prevent the player's line of sight from being guided to the first variable winning device 65.

Before the start of the jackpot game, it is desirable to notify the player of the intention of the operation of the ball effect device 800 in this effect example. For example, by displaying characters such as "There is a privilege if the jackpot round is advanced quickly" and "There is a privilege if the 10th round is passed within 200 seconds" on the third symbol display device 81. , It is possible to make the player understand that the profit is given to the player by rapidly advancing the jackpot game. In addition, if the number of seconds is constantly displayed and updated (countdown), it is possible to prevent the player from playing a big hit game indiscriminately.

Further, the above-mentioned notification is not limited to the notification by the third symbol display device 81. For example, the sound output device 226 may be used to generate the same sound, or the lamp display device may be used to relate the length of time remaining until the operation timing of the rotating disk 840 to the emission color (for example, time). When it is long, it emits light in blue, and when it becomes short, it may be notified (by changing the emission color to red, etc.).

<Direction 2. When operating with the second and third operation patterns>
With reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, another example of the effect using the ball effect device 800 (second effect example) will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the timing change of the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 in the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the second effect example in the second operation pattern. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the timing change of the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 in the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the second effect example in the third operation pattern. be. In addition, in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the timing change of the rotating disk 840 is the same. Further, in FIGS. 31 and 32, it is illustrated that the case where the rotary disk 840 is maintained in the first receiving state and the case where the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the second receiving state can be switched. In this case, the term “maintained” is not limited to the case where the rotary disk 840 is stopped, and for example, the rotary disk 840 rotates within a short time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (less than the maintenance speed SV). (Rotates at the speed of) Includes the case of returning to the same state again.

In the example described here, in the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot A, the MPU 201 is large so that the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 operate based on the second operation pattern. In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot C, the opening solenoid is driven and controlled, and the MPU 201 operates so that the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 operate based on the third operation pattern. The large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so that the rotary disk 840 operates based on the operation timing of the second variable winning device 650 in the second and third operation patterns (the start timing of the round game R in the tenth round). The MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 drives and controls the drive motor KM1. The description of the portion overlapping with the first operation pattern will be omitted.

The main differences between the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern from the first operation pattern are the presence / absence of short-time opening, the operation time T2 of the second variable winning device 650, and the operation of the storage plate 657. The timing, the opening order of the variable winning devices 65, 650, and the operation mode of the rotating disk 840. These will be explained in order, including these.

First, in the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the round game R in a specific round is executed with a short opening that makes it difficult to win a ball. For example, in the 10th round round game R of the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the short opening operation time TMI (maximum 0.2 seconds). After that, it is controlled to close. In the 13th round round game R of the second operation pattern, the first variable winning device 65 is similarly opened for a short time.

In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the operation time of the second variable winning device 650 is set to the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds). That is, the MPU 201 has elapsed or a specified number of round end conditions (round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T2)) in the round game R in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened (the present embodiment). Then, when the winning of 10) pachinko balls) is satisfied, the large opening solenoid is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 651 to the closed state and close the second specified winning opening 650a, and the round game R Is finished. Since it is impossible to win a specified number of balls in the second specific winning opening 650a at the operating time T2 in consideration of the firing interval of the balls (0.6 seconds / piece at the shortest), the second operating pattern And in the third operation pattern, the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is closed with the lapse of the operation time T2.

In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the operation timing of the storage plate 657 is from the start timing of the round game R of the corresponding round (opening timing of the opening / closing plate 651) to the specified period TE2a (in the present embodiment). It is said that 4 seconds have passed. That is, when the specified period TE2a elapses from the start timing of the round game R of the corresponding round, the MPU 201 performs the present execution for several seconds (a sufficient time for the ball to pass) from the regulated state to the allowable state of the storage plate 657. In the mode, the solenoid for the storage plate is driven and controlled so as to switch (for 0.5 seconds) and then return to the regulated state. As a result, among the balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 650a in the round game R of the corresponding round, the balls that have come into contact with the right side of the storage plate 657 and have stagnated are guided to the communication opening 654.

In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the MPU 201 causes the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 to operate for a long time from the first round to the ninth round, while the tenth round. After that, the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is operated in the even-numbered round, and the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 is operated in the odd-numbered round.

As described above, there is no difference between the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern by the 9th round, and the difference occurs after the 10th round. That is, the timing at which the ball flows into the rolling flow path portion 870 differs depending on whether the round game R in the 13th round is open for a long time or open for a short time. Focusing on this difference, the operation mode of the rotary disk 840 (particularly, the second specified time TE2b) is defined.

That is, the MPU 221 shifts the rotary disk 840 from the first receiving state to the second receiving state when a period exceeding the specified time TE2a (6 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the 10th round round game R. The drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled so as to be switched and held in the second receiving state. After that, when the second specified time TE2b (25 seconds in the present embodiment) exceeding the specified time TE2a elapses from the start of the 10th round round game R, a short time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) In the meantime, the rotating disk 840 rotates (rotates at a speed less than the maintenance speed SV) and returns to the second receiving state again.

The second specified time TE2b abuts on the storage plate 657 in the 14th round round game R when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, and then the timing at which the ball reaches the rotating disk 840 and the second. When the jackpot game is performed in the operation pattern of 3, the timing is defined as the timing between the contact with the storage plate 657 in the round game R of the 14th round and the timing at which the ball reaches the rotating disk 840.

That is, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, assuming that the round game R of the 11th round is completed in 6 seconds, the period from the start of the round game R of the 10th round to the start of the 14th round is 17 .4 seconds, 4 seconds from the start of the 14th round round game R until the storage plate 657 changes to the allowable state, and then 1 second until the ball reaches the rotating disk 840. Therefore, the timing at which the ball abuts on the storage plate 657 in the 14th round round game R and then reaches the rotating disk 840 is 22.4 seconds after the start of the 10th round round game R.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, assuming that the 11th round and the 13th round round game R are completed in 6 seconds respectively, 14 rounds are started from the start of the 10th round round game R. It takes 23.2 seconds to start the eyes, 4 seconds from the start of the 14th round round game R until the storage plate 657 changes to the allowable state, and then until the ball reaches the rotating disk 840. Is 1 second, so the ball abuts on the storage plate 657 in the 14th round round game R, and then the ball reaches the rotating disk 840 from the start of the 10th round round game R 28. It will be 2 seconds later.

As described above, in the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, due to the difference in the operation mode of the first variable winning device 65 in the 13th round, the storage plate 657 and the storage plate 657 in the round game R in the 14th round. After the contact, there is a difference in the timing at which the sphere arrives at the rotating disk 840, and during this timing, the rotating disk 840 rotates with the passage of the second specified time TE2b. With the rotation of the rotating disk 840, the spheres staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 are discharged through the second through hole KH2.

Then, MPU221 is the latest 75.2 seconds (11th round and 13th round round game) as the timing 3 seconds after the end of the 14th round round game R from the start of the 10th round round game R. When 30 seconds have passed for each, the rotating disk 840 is rotated (rotated at a speed less than the maintenance speed SV) for a short time (3 seconds in this embodiment), and the remaining balls are removed. The rotary disk 840 is driven and controlled so as to be discharged from the second through hole KH2 and returned to the first receiving state.

As described above, in the case of the second operation pattern, since a plurality of (two) balls can flow into the ball effect device 800 before the second specified time TE2b elapses, the first penetration is performed first. The ball that stayed on the front side of the hole KH1 (the ball that entered the second variable winning device 650 in the 12th round round game R) is followed by the ball (the second variable winning in the 14th round round game R). (A ball that has entered the device 650) can be made to collide, and the previously accumulated ball can be flowed to the back side of the first through hole KH1 and the ball can be detected by the detection sensor SC1 (see FIG. 24). ).

On the other hand, in the case of the third operation pattern, one ball flows into the ball effecting device 800 before the second specified time TE2b elapses (enters the second variable winning device 650 in the 12th round round game R). Since it is only a ball (ball), and the ball is discharged from the second through hole KH2 in advance after the lapse of the second specified time TE2b (see FIG. 26), the follow-up ball (the 14th round round game R is the first). The ball entered into the 2 variable winning device 650) is received by the empty second guide hole 846 and stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1. Therefore, since the sphere does not pass through the first through hole KH1, the sphere is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

In this way, by changing the operation mode of the variable winning devices 65 and 650 between the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, it is assumed that the ball is similarly fired (unleashed) and the jackpot game is performed. Also, it is possible to cause a case where the sphere passes through the detection sensor SC1 and a case where the sphere does not pass through the detection sensor SC1.

Although the state of the storage plate 657 changes in the 10th round round game R, the opening period of the opening / closing plate 651 is too short and the ball does not normally enter, so immediately after the 10th round round game R. It is unlikely that the ball will flow into the ball effect device 800. If the ball miraculously enters the second variable winning device 650 in the 10th round round game R, the ball is the rotating disk 840 while the rotating disk 840 maintains the first receiving state. As it reaches, it passes through the first through hole KH1 as it is and is detected by the detection sensor SC1. Therefore, in the 10th round game R, the motivation of the player who keeps firing the ball in order to enter the ball into the second variable winning device 650 can be improved.

Further, as another operation pattern, an operation pattern may be set in which only the opening time in the 10th round round game R is extended from the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern.

According to the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, it is difficult for the player to grasp which operation pattern is used until the 12th round round game R has elapsed. On the other hand, when a long time elapses in the 11th round round game R, even if each variable winning device 65,650a is opened in the second operation pattern, the follow-up ball (14th round round game R). The second specified time TE2b elapses before the ball entered into the second variable winning device 650) reaches the rotating disk 840, and the ball cannot be passed through the detection sensor SC1. Therefore, in the 11th round round game R, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player who keeps firing the ball in order to make the ball enter the first variable winning device 65 in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress single shots.

<Direction 3. Use of speed changes such as SV and MDV>
With reference to FIG. 33, another example (third effect example) of the effect using the ball effect device 800 will be described. 33 (a) and 33 (b) are views showing an example of the timing change of the ball staging device 800. In FIG. 33 (a), after the storage plate 657 is in the allowable state, the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1 within the specified time TE3a, but in FIG. 33 (b), the storage plate 657 is in the allowable state. The case where the passage of the sphere is not detected by the detection sensor SC1 within the specified period TE3a is shown in the figure. Here, the specified time TE3a is set to a time sufficient for the sphere to be guided to any of the guide holes 845 and 846 (3 seconds in this production example) in the first operation of the rotary disk 840.

In the third production example, the numerical values of the corresponding counters C1 and C2 are added (1 is added) due to the ball passing through the detection sensors SC1 and SC2, and the jackpot game is started. Along with this, the numerical values of the counters C1 and C2 are cleared (C1, C2 = 0). Further, in the embodiment described in the third production example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 perform the opening / closing operation in the above-mentioned first operation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. Illustration is omitted.

In the third effect example, the MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor KN1 in a mode in which the rotary disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 is rotated in the first operation when the jackpot game starts. The first operation of the rotary disk 840 in the third production example will be described.

The first operation of the rotating disk 840 is that the rotating disk 840 is normally rotated in the rotation direction CW at a maintenance speed SV (a speed of half rotation in one second), and is in the first receiving state or the second receiving state. In addition, it is an operation of temporarily stopping the ball for a sufficient time (1 second in this production example) for the ball to pass through the rotating disk 840. That is, it is a 4-second cycle operation in which a rotation operation and a pause are alternately repeated every second.

The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor KM1 so as to change the operating speed of the rotary disk 840 due to the frame button 22 being operated by the player during the period of the first round game R. For example, an embodiment in which the drive motor KM1 is stopped, decelerated, or accelerated while the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, or for several seconds due to one pressing of the frame button 22. Drive control is performed with. After that, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the rotary disk 840 is rotated at the maintenance speed SV again.

Since the MPU 221 changes the operating speed of the drive motor KM1 due to the operation of the frame button 22, the rotating disk 840 when the same time has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game after the first round round game R. The state changes depending on the operation mode of the frame button 22 during the period of the first round game R.

As shown in FIG. 33A, in the third production example, the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 and the second specific winning opening 650a are set from the start of the first round game R. The storage plate 657 is switched to the allowable state at the timing when 32 seconds, which is a longer time than the total time (less than 1 second) required for the passed ball to reach the storage plate 657, has elapsed. When it is detected that the sphere has passed through the detection sensor SC1 (the value of the counter C1 becomes 1) by the time when the specified time TE3a elapses after the storage plate 657 is switched to the allowable state, the MPU 221 is a rotating circle. The drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled in a mode in which the plate 840 is rotated in the second operation, and notifications related to the interests of the player are performed.

The device that performs this notification is not limited. For example, it may be performed by the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, or the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the numerical value of the counter C1 immediately after the rotary disk 840 is in the first receiving state (immediately after the detection unit SGb is detected by the angle detection sensor KSC1) becomes 1 instead of the passage of the specified time TE3a. It may be determined whether or not.

The second operation of the rotary disk 840 differs from the first operation only in that the speed during the rotation operation is the discharge speed MDV. By rotating the rotating disk 840 in the second operation, the ball that has reached the rotating disk 840 subsequently passes through the first through hole KH1 via the first guide hole 845 and passes through the detection sensor SC1. By doing so, the value of the counter C1 is added, or the value of the counter C2 is added by passing through the second through hole KH2 via the second guide hole 846 and passing through the detection sensor SC2. ..

Then, after the total of the numerical values of the counters C1 and C2 becomes 2, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the rotating disk 840 is set to the first receiving state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), it is not detected that the ball has passed through the detection sensor SC1 by the time when the specified time TE3a elapses after the storage plate 657 is switched to the allowable state (the numerical value of the counter C1 is: In the case of (remaining 0), it is determined that the sphere has entered the second guide hole 846 and is staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1, and the MPU221 maintains the drive mode of the drive motor KM1 and the first 3 An input suggestion effect is performed by a notification means such as a symbol display device 81.

The input suggestion effect is composed of an explanatory effect of the input method and an instruction effect that occurs periodically (every time the rotating disk 840 is in the first receiving state). In the explanatory staging, the player is instructed to operate using the frame button 22 after that, and the player is informed that the operation is successful according to the instruction content, which is advantageous for the player. Will be done. It should be noted that this advantageous mode of notification is not limited in any way. For example, notification of whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state (notification that it is a latent probable change) or notification of round promotion may be used.

In the instruction effect, an operation method such as "press and hold the right side of the frame button 22" and "press the upper button of the frame button 22 repeatedly" is instructed. When the MPU221 determines that the operation as instructed is performed, the MPU221 maintains the driving mode of the driving motor KM1. Therefore, by continuing to perform the operation as instructed, the ball can be continuously retained on the front side of the first through hole KH1, so that the second ball is placed on the rotating disk 840 after the 10th round game R. When the ball arrives, whether the ball enters the first guide hole 845 or the second guide hole 846, the ball will pass through the detection sensor SC1 and the MPU221 will notify the player's interests. Can be executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the MPU 221 that the operation as instructed has not been performed, the MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor KM1 in a mode in which the rotary disk 840 is rotated in the second operation, and the third symbol display device 81. An effect indicating that the operation according to the instruction content has failed is executed, and the subsequent instruction effect is omitted.

When the rotating disk 840 rotates in the second operation, the sphere staying in the second guide hole 846 flows down through the second through hole KH2 and is detected by the detection sensor SC2. As a result, the numerical value of the counter C2 is added.

After that, similarly, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the rotary disk 840 is in the first receiving state because the total of the numerical values of the counters C1 and C2 becomes 2.

As described above, according to the third effect example, after the input suggestion effect is generated, it is better to operate the frame button 22 according to the instruction effect to increase the possibility that the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1. Therefore, the player's attention can be directed to grasping the operation method and executing the operation. Therefore, in the jackpot game, compared to the case where only the firing of the ball and the processing of the payout ball are chased, the player's mind is distracted to the operation of the frame button 22, and the player gives a special hitting method (single hitting, etc.). You can take away the room to do it. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game.

<Direction 4. Directing across jackpots ＞
With reference to FIG. 34, another example of the effect using the ball effect device 800 (fourth effect example) will be described. In the fourth effect example, a case where it can be determined that a big hit is continuously obtained in a short time by passing the ball through the detection sensor SC1 before the 10th round game R will be described. In this case, it is possible to determine that the jackpot has occurred continuously in a short time independently of the MPU 201 of the main control device.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the time change of the storage plate 657 and the time change of the ball effect device 800 with respect to the jackpot game. In the fourth production example, regardless of the jackpot type, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a open and close in the first operation pattern, while the operation timing of the storage plate 657 is the third production example. The timing is the same as described above.

In the fourth production example, the MPU 221 holds the rotating disk 840 in the second receiving state for 150 seconds, and then rotates at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV at the rotation operation time point RP that visits every 150 seconds, and then again the second. The drive motor KN1 is driven and controlled in a manner of repeating returning to the receiving state. That is, when a sphere is retained in the second guide hole 846 of the rotating disk 840 on the front side of the first through hole KH1, the sphere passes through the second through hole KH2 by the rotation of the rotating disk 840. It passes through the detection sensor SC2 and is discharged from the ball effect device 800.

In the fourth effect example, the rotary disk 840 does not pause in the first receiving state, and the event that the ball passes through the first through hole KH1 through the first guide hole 845 is prevented from occurring. .. Therefore, the event that the ball passes through the first through hole KH1 occurs mainly when the ball staying on the front side of the first through hole KH1 is pushed by the trailing ball (see FIG. 24).

Here, as shown in FIG. 34, when the rotary disk 840 becomes the rotation operation time point RP 10 seconds before the operation time TSa calculated from the start timing of the 10th round round game R elapses, the rotary disk rotates. About 140 seconds elapse before the 840 rotates next time. For example, even if about 10 seconds have passed in each round game R from the 11th round, the nth big hit game ends in about 73 seconds after that, so even after the nth big hit game ends, the first through hole KH1 The state in which the ball stays on the front side of is continued.

After the end of the nth jackpot game, the game will be played to receive a lottery to win the n + 1th jackpot, but if the interval until the n + 1th jackpot is won is short, the rotating disk 840 is next. The operation time TSa calculated from the start timing of the first round round game R in the n + 1th big hit game may elapse before the rotation in the rotation operation time point RP.

For example, according to the example shown in FIG. 34, it is assumed that the round game R of each round progresses in about 10 seconds, and the time from the start of the 10th round of the jackpot game R of the nth jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. The sum of (83 seconds) and the time (10 seconds) until the start of the first round of the jackpot game R of the n + 1th jackpot game is the time until the next rotating disk 840 rotates 140. This is a case where a big hit is obtained during the lottery specified time TE4a (47 seconds), which is the time subtracted from the seconds.

Assuming that it takes about 3 seconds for one variation display, according to the example shown in FIG. 34, the variation display can be executed about 15 times during the lottery specified time TE4a. That is, it is possible to include the case where the n + 1th big hit is obtained by the lottery of the number of times when the maximum number of reserved balls (4 pieces) of the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 is exceeded.

In this case, when the n + 1th jackpot game is started, the ball restricted to the storage plate 657 in the first round game R while the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the second receiving state is the storage plate. Due to the change to the allowable state of 657, it flows down toward the rotating disk 840. The flowing ball pushes the ball (the ball that has stayed from the nth big hit game) that had previously stayed on the front side of the first through hole KH1 and passes through the first through hole KH1 to detect the sensor. It passes through SC1 and is discharged from the ball effect device 800.

On the other hand, if the jackpot cannot be obtained during the lottery specified time TE4a, the ball regulated by the storage plate 657 in the first round game R is changed to the allowable state of the storage plate 657, and the rotation circle is formed. The rotating disk 840 is rotated before flowing down toward the plate 840, and the ball accumulated on the front side of the first through hole KH1 is discharged. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down toward the rotating disk 840 newly stays on the front side of the first through hole KH1 and does not pass through the detection sensor SC1.

That is, in the fourth effect example, the lottery specified time TE4a is defined by the progress degree of the nth big hit game and the operation cycle of the ball effect device 800, and the lottery specified time TE4a is defined from the end of the nth big hit game. By acquiring the n + 1th jackpot before the lapse of time, the ball can be passed through the detection sensor SC1 a few seconds after the storage plate 657 is allowed to be in the allowable state in the first round game R.

In other words, a few seconds after the storage plate 657 was allowed to be in the allowable state in the first round game R, the detection sensor SC1 detected the passage of the ball, and the MPU221 was told that a continuous jackpot occurred at short intervals. It can be determined (it can be determined regardless of the signal of MPU201). As a result, when determining the occurrence of a jackpot in a short time based on the signal from MPU201 (for example, the number and period of fluctuations until the nth jackpot is acquired and the n + 1th jackpot are acquired are stored. The control flow can be shortened as compared with (when determining the number and period of fluctuations when the n + 1th jackpot occurs).

In the fourth effect example, when the detection sensor SC1 detects the passage of the ball a few seconds after the storage plate 657 is allowed to be in the allowable state in the first round game R, the MPU 221 is used a plurality of times in a short time. A continuous jackpot notification effect is performed to notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The mode of the continuous jackpot notification effect is not limited at all. For example, it may be a notification that generates an electronic sound that does not normally flow, a notification that causes a rainbow-colored light emission by an LED, or an effect of displaying the characters "Congratulations" on at least a part of the third symbol display device 81. But it's okay.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the second guide hole 846 retains the sphere when one sphere arrives, and allows the sphere to pass through the first through hole KH1 when an additional second sphere arrives. The case where the shape is used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when passing spheres through the first through hole KH1, it may be a condition that three or more spheres stay. As a result, the frequency of passing the sphere through the first through hole KH1 can be reduced, so that the rarity value of the effect output based on the passage of the detection sensor SC1 can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the back surface side of the shielding plate portion 851 is composed of a smooth shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a low-repulsion member such as a rubber plate member is attached to the back side of the shielding plate portion 851, and when a ball staying in the second guide hole 846 is pushed out to the front side, the low-repulsion member is used. You may make it collide. In this case, it is possible to reduce the momentum (velocity) of the ball pushed out to the front side by the inclined plate portion 841f2 to bounce back to the back side. Therefore, the magnitude of the maintenance speed SV can be reduced.

Further, instead of the low-repulsion member, a groove may be formed which is configured to change the momentum (velocity) when the ball colliding with the ball rebounds due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating disk 840. In this case, due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating disk 840, the ball repels vigorously and easily passes through the second through hole KH2, and the repulsion of the ball is weak and it is difficult to pass through the second through hole KH2. Can be configured.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front cover 851 is made of a light-transmitting resin material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the front cover 851 may be configured in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize the back side from the front side because the light is not transmitted or the degree of the transmitted light is low. In this case, after the rotating disk 840 is guided to the second guide hole 846 in the second receiving state, the drive motor KM1 is driven and controlled so as to be in the receiving prevention state, thereby guiding the second guide. The ball staying in the hole 846 can be hidden by the front cover 851. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to know which of the guide holes 845 and 846 of the rotating disk 840 the first ball has entered.

In the first embodiment, the case where a part of the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is guided to the ball staging device 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, one of the balls that has passed through any of the first variable winning device 65, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the general winning opening 63, the normal entry opening (through gate) 67, or the out opening 661. The unit may be guided to the ball effect device 800, or a passage (so-called “warp”) that guides the ball from the left side of the center frame 86 to the upper position of the first ball entry port 64 through the lower part of the center frame. A part of the ball that has passed through the ball may be guided to the ball staging device 800, or a ball passing opening that is different from the winning opening and through which the ball can pass is arranged in the game board 13, and the ball passing opening is provided. A part of the ball that has passed through the ball may be guided to the ball effect device 800.

For example, when all the balls that have passed through the first ball entry port 64 are guided to the ball effect device 800, the second guide hole 846 is opened at 5 second intervals while maintaining the second receiving state of the rotating disk 840. 2 The drive motor KM1 is driven by arranging it on the front side of the through hole KH2 and discharging the ball staying in the second guide hole 846 (the speed at which the rotary disk 840 rotates at a speed lower than the maintenance speed SV). In this case, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection sensor SC1, it can be determined that the ball has passed through the first ball entry port 64 continuously at intervals of less than 5 seconds. Therefore, by performing a specific effect based on the passage of the ball through the detection sensor SC1 and controlling the player to notify the player, the player frequently receives the notification and the ball passes through the first entry port 64. You can easily grasp what you are doing.

In the first embodiment, the case where the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened is sandwiched between the rounds in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened and the round game R is performed has been described. Not limited. For example, the second variable winning device 650 may be opened and the rounds in which the round game R is performed may be arranged continuously (adjacent), or in one big hit game, the second variable winning device 650 may be opened and the round may be performed. The round in which the game R is performed may be configured only once.

In the first embodiment, the case where the second variable winning device 650 is opened and the round in which the round game R is performed is arranged immediately after the start of the big hit game and near the end of the big hit game has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, it may be placed in the middle of the jackpot game.

In the first embodiment, the case where the storage plate 657 is in the allowable state when a certain period of time has elapsed after the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the storage plate 657 may be in the allowable state when a certain period of time has elapsed after the opening / closing plate 651 of the second variable winning device 650 is closed.

Further, the storage plate 657 may be allowed at the timing when the ball is not detected in the second specific winning opening 650a in the state where the ball is not arranged between the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage plate 657. .. In this case, in comparison with the period required for the ball passing through the second specific winning opening 650a to reach the storage plate 657, the ball is in the period until the storage plate 657 is closed (for example, 0.5 seconds). It does not reach the storage plate 657. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from accidentally passing through the storage plate 657 in the allowable state.

In the first embodiment, when the sphere P11 stays in the second guide hole 846 and the sphere P12 collides with the sphere P11 from the front side thereof, the sphere P11 is discharged to the back side of the rotating disk 840 and the sphere P12. Has described the case where it remains inside the rotating disk 840, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as the sphere P11 is discharged to the back surface side of the rotating disk 840, the sphere P12 may also be discharged from the rotating disk 840. In this case, since the ball P12 can be prevented from being pushed by the ball supplied thereafter and passing through the first through hole KH1, a collision of the balls occurs every time the storage plate 657 is in an allowable state. , It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down through the first through hole KH1.

In the first production example of the first embodiment, the case where the line of sight of the player is guided to the first variable winning device 65 in the second and subsequent round game R has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, during the round game R in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the third symbol display device 81 notifies that "attention should be paid to the central rotating body", or the LED arranged on the substrate 862. May be made to emit light to guide the player's line of sight to the rotating disk 840. This makes it difficult for the player to know how many balls have entered the first variable winning device 65, and the accuracy of single-shot hitting (the round game R is completed in a short time while performing single-shot hitting). Accuracy) can be lowered.

In the first production example of the first embodiment, the operation timing of the rotary disk 840 is set to the time expected to be required for the round game R when the jackpot game is advanced by leaving it untouched, and the special hit such as a single hit. Although it is specified by comparison with the time expected to be required for the round game R when the jackpot game is advanced while being performed, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate period, which is an intermediate period that is neither short nor long required for the round game R, is set, and after the intermediate period elapses, a notification is given to guide the ball to the rotating disk 840 for a certain period. (For example, "Keep this round for how many seconds", etc.), the rotating disk 840 is operated in such a manner that the sphere can pass through the detection sensor SC1 by guiding the sphere to the rotating disk 840 for a certain period of time. You may let me. In this case, the jackpot game can be executed while allowing the player to consider the period for advancing the round game R (how to launch the ball). In this case, since the period required for the jackpot game can be consciously lengthened, the speed of paying out the prize balls can be reduced.

In the first effect example of the first embodiment, the case where the rotating disk 840 rotates in one way in the rotation direction CW has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, for a predetermined period, the rotary disk 840 is maintained in the second receiving state, and during operation, the second guide hole 846 is single on the front side of the first through hole KH1 and the front side of the second through hole KH2. The rotary disk 840 may be temporarily stopped when the second guide hole 846 reaches the front side of the second through hole KH2 at the shortest time interval of the round game R. ). As a result, the spheres staying in the second guide hole 846 flow down through the second through hole KH2 before the plurality of spheres gather in the second guide hole 846, and are discharged from the rotary disk 840. It is possible to prevent detection by the detection sensor SC1.

In the first effect example of the first embodiment, the case where the rotary disk 840 maintains the second receiving state from the lapse of the operating time TSS to the lapse of the specified time TEc has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the drive motor KM1 is driven in a manner in which the first operation (rotational speed is the operation of the maintenance speed SV) described in the third production example is repeated from the lapse of the operation time TSS to the lapse of the specified time TEc. You may control it. In this case, among the balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650a in the 10th round round game R before the lapse of the specified time TEc, the ball that comes into contact with the storage plate 657 and is guided to the ball effecting device 800. , The case of being guided by the first guide hole 845 and the case of being guided by the second guide hole 846 can occur. Before the lapse of the specified time TEc, the sphere will pass through the detection sensor SC1 regardless of which of the guide holes 845 and 846 is guided. Since it is difficult to distinguish it from the rotational movement of the rotating disk 840 during the lapse of time, the player's attention to the ball effect device 800 in terms of whether or not the ball flows down to the detection sensor SC1 near the specified time TEc. Can be improved.

In the first effect example of the first embodiment, the case where the rotating disk 840 of the ball effect device 800 is maintained in the second receiving state after the lapse of the operating time TSS has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the receiving prevention state by rotating about 60 degrees from the second receiving state to the front view clockwise from the start of the first round game R until the operating time TSa elapses, and the operating time is maintained. The drive may be controlled so that the rotary disk 840 rotates after a sufficient time has elapsed from the passage of the TSa to reach the rotary disk 840, and the ball is in the second receiving state. In this case, the sphere that has reached the rotary disk 840 can be brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion 841a to reduce the speed in the front-rear direction and then guided to the second guide hole 846, so that the ball can be directed toward the rotary disk 840. To prevent the ball from accidentally passing through the first through hole KH1 with the momentum when the speed in the front-rear direction of the ball unexpectedly increases while flowing down the rolling flow path portion 870. Can be done.

Further, by rotating the rotating disk 840 in a state where the sphere is in contact with the plate-shaped portion 841a, the rubbing friction between the sphere staying on the front side of the rotating disk 840 and the plate-shaped portion 841a causes. Since the sphere can be moved left and right, it is possible to improve the attention to the sphere that has reached the rotating disk 840.

This also applies to the 10th round round game R. That is, after the first ball is guided to the second guide hole 846, the rotating disk 840 is maintained in the receiving prevention state again, and the specified time TEc has elapsed from the end of the special figure variation display (design variation effect). The drive motor KM1 may be driven and controlled so that the rotary disk 840 is rotated at the same time, the rotary disk 840 is temporarily stopped in the second receiving state, and then the rotary disk 840 is rotated once. In this case, if the second ball is made to flow down toward the rotating disk 840 in the 10th round round game R before the lapse of the specified time TEc, the ball abuts on the plate-shaped portion 841a and is a rotating circle. As the rotating disk 840 stays on the front side of the plate 840 and becomes the second receiving state, it is guided to the second guide hole 846, and the first ball is pushed out to the second ball, and the first ball is pushed out. It passes through the through hole KH1 and is detected by the detection sensor SC1.

Further, the rotating disk 840 may be maintained in the receiving prevention state from the lapse of the specified time TEc until the rotating disk 840 is rotationally driven after the start of the 15th round round game R. As a result, when the second ball is flowed down toward the rotating disk 840 in the 10th round round game R after the lapse of the specified time TEc, the surplus ball mistakenly passes through the first through hole KH1. Can be prevented from doing so.

By controlling the drive motor KM1 so that the sphere is once brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion 841a of the rotary disk 840 and the sphere is retained on the front side of the rotary disk 840, the rotary disk 840 is formed. It is possible to configure an effect that draws attention to the direction of rotation. For example, when the first receiving state is configured by rotationally driving clockwise, while the receiving prevention state is configured as the situation constituting the second receiving state by rotating counterclockwise, the receiving state is configured. It is more profitable for the player to rotate the rotating disk 840 clockwise after the ball comes into contact with the plate-shaped portion 841a in the prevented state (even if the ball does not stay in the second guide hole 846, the ball is not retained in the second guide hole 846. Can be passed through the detection sensor SC1). Therefore, by performing such notification, the attention of the rotating disk 840 can be improved. Further, when the ball is staying in the second guide hole 846, the ball can be passed through the detection sensor SC1 regardless of the rotation direction, so that the player's sense of security can be improved.

In the first effect example of the first embodiment, the driving mode of the ball effect device 800 is advantageous for the player by causing the second ball to reach the rotating disk 840 before the predetermined time TEc elapses. Although the case of generating the notification has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time from the start of the jackpot game is measured without using the ball effect device 800, and the jackpot game is specified by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 100 seconds, 200 seconds, etc.) elapses from the start of the jackpot game. It may be determined whether or not the round is completed, and if it is determined that a specific round of the jackpot game is completed by the lapse of a predetermined time, the player may be controlled to be notified in an advantageous manner. In this case, regardless of the arrangement of the ball staging device 800, a display staging (countdown display or the like) related to a predetermined time can be performed at an arbitrary position, so that the degree of freedom of staging can be improved. In addition, the display effect can be used to incite the player (accelerate the progress of the jackpot game), and it is possible to easily deprive the player of the margin for stopping the interval.

In the first production example of the first embodiment, the presence or absence of a single shot is determined from the length of the period required for the jackpot game, and a case where it is easier for the player to generate an advantageous notification if the single shot is not performed will be described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, the presence or absence of a single shot may be determined from a numerical value obtained by subtracting the number of balls that have passed through the specific winning openings 65a and 650a from the number of balls fired in the jackpot game. In the first operation pattern described together with the first production example, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set to 2 seconds. From 6 seconds / piece), at least one or two balls should flow down without being guided to the specific winning openings 65a and 650a and pass through the out opening 661. Therefore, in the case of a 15-round jackpot game, about 14 to 28 balls will pass through the out opening 661.

Therefore, when the numerical value obtained by subtracting the number of balls that have passed through the specific winning openings 65a and 650a from the number of shot balls is smaller than the number of about 14 to 28 (for example, less than 14), the player It is determined that a single shot is being made, and control is performed so that the player is not notified in a favorable manner. On the other hand, if the values are the same (for example, 14 or more), it is determined that the single shot is not performed. , May be controlled so as to give an advantageous notification to the player.

Further, it is detected that the ball has passed through the out port 661 at a timing delayed from the interval between rounds by the time from when the ball has passed through the first variable winning device 65 to when it is detected that the ball has passed through the out port 661. If this is the case, it is determined that the interval is not stopped, and the player is notified in an advantageous manner. On the other hand, if it is not detected that the ball has passed through the out port 661 at the same timing, the interval is set. It may be determined that the stop is being performed, and the player may be controlled so as not to give an advantageous notification to the player.

The position for detecting the passage of the ball is not limited to the out port 661. For example, the detection sensor may be arranged at a position formed by a single passage on the downstream side of the return rubber 69. This detection sensor detects all balls fired by hitting right. Whether or not there is an interval pause can be determined by the relationship between the output from the detection sensor and the timing of the opening / closing operation of the variable winning devices 65 and 650.

That is, when the jackpot game is played unattended, the output of this detection sensor is always composed of a waveform having the same interval as the ball firing interval (minimum 0.6 seconds / piece) specified for each gaming machine. Will be done. On the other hand, when the game is played aiming at the interval stop, the output of the detection sensor is wider than the firing interval of the ball before the closing timing of the variable winning devices 65 and 650 is reached. Therefore, if the variable winning devices 65 and 650 are closed within a predetermined period after the interval of the output waveform of the detection sensor is widened as compared with the firing interval of the sphere, it is determined that the interval interval is stopped. Can be done.

In the third effect example of the first embodiment, the operating speed of the rotating disk 840 changes when the ball passes through the detection sensor SC1 or the player fails to operate the frame button 22 as instructed. The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the mode of change in the operating speed may be defined by the jackpot type of the special symbol. For example, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (probability variation jackpot), the drive motor KN1 is driven and controlled so that the operating speed of the rotary disk 840 is maintained at the maintenance speed SV. Thereby, regardless of whether the first ball is guided by the first guide hole 845 or the second guide hole 845, the detection sensor SC1 can pass the ball.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (normal jackpot), the part that stops in the first receiving state is omitted from the operation mode of the rotating disk 840 in the first production example, and the ball is guided in the first receiving state. The drive motor KN1 is driven and controlled so that the operating speed of the rotary disk 840 is initially set to the maintenance speed SV and changes to less than the maintenance speed SV from the middle. As a result, the ball guided by the rotating disk 840 can flow down through the second through hole KH2 without exception. As a result, the player's concentration can be directed to whether or not the ball is ejected from the second through hole KH2, so that special hits such as single hits can be suppressed.

Further, the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 in the round game R after the round may be changed depending on the length of time spent on the round game R. For example, when it is determined that the round game R takes more time than necessary (for example, 30 seconds which is the maximum time of the operating time T1), it is determined that a single hit is performed, and the first receiving state is used. The drive motor KM1 may be driven and controlled so that the rotation speed of the rotating disk 840 is less than the maintenance speed SV while preventing the sphere from being guided. The length of time to be determined may be the length of time spanning a plurality of rounds.

In the third effect example of the first embodiment, when it is determined by the MPU 221 that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect is performed, the case where the rotary disk 840 rotates at the maintenance speed SV has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when it is determined by the MPU 221 that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect is performed, the rotating disk 840 may be rotated half a turn in the opposite direction (counterclockwise). In this case, since the second guide hole 846 is not arranged on the front side of the second through hole KH2, the ball can be continuously retained in the second guide hole 846 regardless of the operating speed of the rotating disk 840.

In the third effect example of the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating disk 840 is maintained as long as it is continuously determined by the MPU 221 that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect is performed, and the operation is performed as instructed even once. Although it has been described that the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 becomes less than the maintenance speed SV when it is determined by the MPU 221 that the failure has occurred, the ball staying in the second guide hole 846 is discharged through the second through hole KH2. It is not limited to this. For example, the operating speed of the rotating disk 840 may be maintained even if the operation fails up to once, and the operating speed of the rotating disk 840 may be lower than the maintenance speed if the operation fails twice, or continuously. It is also possible that the operating speed of the rotating disk 840 is set to be less than the maintenance speed SV for the first time when the operation fails a plurality of times. In this case, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage from becoming excessively large for the player who is unfamiliar with the operation, or to interweave an operation mode that is almost impossible in the instruction staging to improve the attention to the instruction staging. Can be done.

Further, the rotation speed of the rotating disk 840 is determined according to the number of times that the MPU221 determines that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect is performed and the number of times that the MPU221 determines that the operation as instructed by the instruction effect fails. May be stepwise switched to a plurality of speeds equal to or higher than the maintenance speed SV. In this case, when the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 is several steps higher than the maintenance speed SV, the player maintains the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 even if the instruction effect is ignored several times. Since it can be kept above SV, it is possible to concentrate on launching the ball toward the variable winning devices 65 and 650. In this way, if the rotary disk 840 can be ignored when the rotary disk 840 becomes high speed to some extent, the player will pay attention to the rotary disk 840 in an attempt to grasp the rotational speed of the rotary disk 840. The attention of the rotating disk 840 can be improved.

In addition, when the failure of the operation is allowed by the time when the rotation speed of the rotary disk 840 is less than the maintenance speed SV, the player fails to perform the operation as instructed. The MPU 221 may be used to execute a re-instruction effect that directs the operation as instructed. Further, this re-instruction effect may be a stronger effect (for example, stronger light emission, louder volume) than the previous instruction effect. In this case, when the player fails to operate without noticing the instruction effect, it is possible to notice that the operation instruction is given by the re-instruction effect.

The instruction effect or the re-instruction effect may be an effect corresponding to the firing intensity of the ball. In this case, it is possible to give an instruction related to the profit directly given to the player such as a prize ball by the bullet game, and the player can secure the maximum profit by following the instruction.

In the fourth effect example of the first embodiment, the lottery specified time TE4a is defined by the relationship between the progress of the nth jackpot game and the rotation cycle of the rotation disk 840 of the ball effect device 800. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, a different period is newly defined depending on the jackpot type as the period from the end of the jackpot game to the next rotation operation of the rotating disk 840, and the player is notified of the lottery specified time TE4a based on the defined period. It may be a thing. As a result, the lottery specified time TE4a, which differs depending on the jackpot type, can be secured for a certain period, so that it is possible to prevent the lottery specified period TE4a from becoming extremely short. In addition, the new regulation of the period until the rotary disk 840 rotates is executed only when there is a possibility that the lottery regulation period TE4a becomes extremely short, and in other cases, it is the same as the fourth production example. The rotary disk 840 may rotate in the drive mode.

In the fourth effect example of the first embodiment, the case where the number of lottery required to obtain the n + 1th jackpot is smaller makes it easier for the detection sensor SC1 to pass the ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, even if the ball staging device 800 is adopted for a gaming machine in which the number of lottery required to obtain the n + 1th jackpot is fixed (for example, it is fixed at one time and there is no difference). good. In this case, if the number of rounds of the jackpot game is different depending on the jackpot type, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened only in the first round game R (as the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the other rounds). It may be controlled so as to be able to. In this case, as the number of rounds of the nth jackpot game is smaller, the timing of the n + 1th jackpot game arrives earlier, so that it becomes easier for the detection sensor SC1 to pass the ball. That is, the jackpot type of the nth jackpot with a small number of rounds of the jackpot game is detected as compared with the case where the jackpot type of the nth jackpot is a jackpot type with a large number of rounds of the jackpot game. Since the ball can be easily passed through the sensor SC1, it is possible to easily generate a notification that is output based on the passage and is beneficial to the player.

In the fourth effect example of the first embodiment, the lottery specified time TE4a is defined from the driving mode of the ball effect device 800, and the player wins the next big hit before the lottery specified time TE4a elapses. Although the case where the notification that is advantageous to the above is generated has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, did the time from the end of the jackpot game be measured without using the ball effect device 800, and the jackpot was obtained by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 50 seconds, 100 seconds, etc.) elapses from the end of the jackpot game? Whether or not it may be determined by the MPU 201 or MPU 221 may be controlled so that the player is notified in an advantageous manner when it is determined that the jackpot has been won by the lapse of a predetermined time. In this case, regardless of the arrangement of the ball staging device 800, a display staging (countdown display or the like) related to a predetermined time can be performed at an arbitrary position, so that the degree of freedom of staging can be improved. In addition, by inciting the player with the display effect (accelerating the progress of the game), the ball can be continuously fired and the frequency of lottery can be increased, so the expected value of winning a big hit in a certain time is raised. be able to.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<A storage unit that sends a ball to the detection port when the ball arrives with the ball placed>
By arranging a guide means through which the ball can pass, a movable means having a first receiving portion that can accept and displace the ball that has passed through the guiding means, and the first receiving portion at a predetermined position. A gaming machine A1 comprising: a passing means through which a ball can pass through the first receiving portion, and a detecting means for detecting a ball passing through the passing means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that detect that a ball has passed through a detection means and give a certain benefit to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122). However, since the conventional gaming machine described above does not have a function of grasping the situation on the upstream side of the detection means, the flow mode of the ball on the upstream side of the detection means (arrangement of balls, flow speed, flow direction, flow frequency). ), There was a problem that it was difficult to output the production.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is determined that the ball has passed through the passing means with the first receiving portion arranged at a predetermined position by detecting that the ball has passed through the detecting means. can do. That is, the situation on the upstream side of the detection means can be grasped. Therefore, by controlling so as to perform a specific effect when the sphere passes through the detection means, it is possible to easily output an effect corresponding to the flow mode of the sphere on the upstream side of the detection means.

The mode of certain profits is not limited in any way. For example, the prize ball may be paid out to the player, a big hit lottery may be performed, or a specific effect may be performed.

In the gaming machine A1, the passing means allows the passing of balls by collecting a predetermined number or more of balls in the first receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, it is possible to determine that a predetermined number or more of the balls have gathered in the first receiving portion by detecting the passage of the balls by the detecting means. For example, when the ball is ejected from the first receiving portion at regular intervals, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the frequency with which the ball is accepted by the first receiving portion.

In the gaming machine A2, the movable means can receive a ball that has passed through the guiding means, and the first receiving portion receives a second receiving portion that is different from the first receiving portion and a ball that has passed through the guiding means. The second receiving unit includes a switching unit for switching between accepting and accepting by the second receiving unit, and the second receiving unit allows the ball to pass through the passing means through the second receiving unit. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the number of balls received by the unit is set to be different from that of the first receiving unit.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the frequency at which the ball passes through the guiding means, which is necessary for passing the detecting means, can be changed by the switching unit.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the first receiving portion is displaceable in the first or second aspect, and the first receiving portion is displaced in the first aspect, whereby the ball is passed through the first receiving portion. The receiving frequency of the ball required to pass the ball through the passing means is maintained at a predetermined frequency, and the first receiving portion is displaced in the second aspect, so that the ball passes through the first receiving portion to the passing means. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the acceptance frequency of balls required for the displacement is lowered as compared with the predetermined frequency.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the ball required for the ball to pass through the passing means through the first receiving portion by changing the displacement mode of the first receiving portion. The frequency of acceptance can be changed. Therefore, while the effect generated by the ball passing through the detection means is the same, the frequency of receiving the ball required for the ball to pass through the detection means can be changed, so that the difference in the experience value of the player and the difference in the experience value of the player can be changed. , It is possible to easily cope with the difference in the gaming state.

The opportunity to change the displacement of the first receiving portion is not limited at all. For example, the player may operate the operation buttons to change the setting to change the displacement mode, or if the situation changes automatically as the game progresses, such as the game state or the distribution of the jackpot game. It may be a displacement.

Further, the difference between the first aspect and the second aspect is not limited in any way. For example, the operating speed may change, the operating direction may change, or the operating timing may change.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, after the balls pass through the passing means through the first receiving portion, the predetermined number of balls are the first receiving portion while the arrangement of the first receiving portion is maintained. A gaming machine A5 characterized by remaining in.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, when the balls are received by the first receiving portion, even if the receiving interval of the balls does not change, a predetermined number of balls are used. It is possible to shorten the interval at which the ball passes through the detection means after gathering than before gathering at the first receiving portion. Therefore, after the sphere begins to pass through the detection means, the effect generated by the sphere passing through the detection means can be frequently generated.

In the gaming machine A5, the ball passing through the passing means through the first receiving portion is the ball previously collected in the first receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the balls can be replaced inside the first receiving portion, and the detecting means can be passed in order. As a result, by arranging an object other than the spheres in the first receiving portion, it is possible to prevent fraudulent misidentification as if a predetermined number or more of spheres were arranged.

In the gaming machine A6, the first receiving portion forms a state in which the predetermined number of balls previously received is arranged so that the balls can easily pass through the passing means when the balls are next received. A gaming machine A7 characterized by having a passage preparation unit.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, when a predetermined number or more of balls are received, the balls can smoothly pass through the passing means.

In the gaming machine A7, the passage preparation unit is filled with the previously accepted ball, and when the next accepted ball is guided to the passage preparation unit, a load applied to the previously accepted ball occurs. , The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the previously accepted ball is guided to the passing means by the load.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, it is possible to prevent the previously accepted ball from being guided to the passing means before the next ball is accepted.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a first state in which the ball passing through the guiding means is stopped on the upstream side of the first receiving portion and a second state in which the ball is allowed to flow down to the first receiving portion are defined. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being provided with a state changing means to be formed.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the flow of the ball to the first receiving portion can be started at a timing different from the timing when the ball passes through the guiding means. ..

<Produce that special games are continuous in a short period of time>
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a predetermined lottery result. Can be changed from a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter in a privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game based on the display of, and an open state in which the game ball is easily entered in the privileged game executed by the privileged game execution means. A gaming machine comprising various variable winning means, characterized in that it is provided with a multi-type effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects based on differences in game modes related to the privileged game. B1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that pay out a large number of prize balls by a privileged game executed by showing a predetermined lottery result on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if the execution interval and the execution period of the privilege games are different, there is no difference in the production. Therefore, for example, a rare event occurs in which the privilege games occur continuously at short intervals. Even in this case, there is a problem that the rarity cannot be expressed except for the degree of payout of the prize ball, and the player's feeling of exhilaration cannot be sufficiently raised.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the multi-type effect executing means executes a plurality of types of effects based on the difference in the game mode related to the privilege game. Therefore, for example, the privilege games are continuously performed at short intervals. When it occurs, it can be set to execute a dedicated effect according to the situation, and the effect can improve the uplifting feeling of the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the uplifting feeling of the player in terms other than the degree of payout of the prize balls.

It should be noted that the difference in the game mode related to the privilege game is not limited at all. For example, the period for maintaining the open state of the variable winning means due to the difference in the frequency of winning the ball to the variable winning means in the privilege game may be different, or the next privilege game is executed again after the privilege game is completed. It may be a difference in the period until it is done.

In the game machine B1, the multi-type effect executing means is a game when the number of game balls launched in the privilege game and the number of game balls not entered in the variable winning means is larger than a predetermined number. A gaming machine B2 characterized by performing an effect that is advantageous to a person.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, when the number of gaming balls lost to the player without winning the variable winning means is larger than the predetermined number, the effect is advantageous to the player. Is executed, the bonus game is played in a game mode in which the game ball is released (not stopped), and when the operation of the variable winning means is grasped and the game ball is closed, the game ball does not reach the variable winning means. It is possible to reduce the difference in profit given to the player between the case of playing in the game mode of adjusting and firing (stopping) in such a manner.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, the variable winning means is a gaming ball that opens and closes based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the privileged game and enters the variable winning means, and is in the open state of the variable winning means. An opening / closing means for entering the corresponding number of game balls into the effect area corresponding to the number of times the state changes, and a ball entry detection means capable of detecting the game balls entering the effect area by satisfying a predetermined detection condition. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the predetermined detection condition is such that a predetermined multiple of the corresponding number of balls enters the effect area during a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it can be grasped that a predetermined detection condition is satisfied based on the detection of the ball by the ball entry detecting means, and a predetermined period of time can be obtained. Since it is possible to determine the number of times the opening / closing means has been opened / closed during the period, it is possible to determine the difference in the execution interval and the execution period of the privileged game by calculating from the number of times of opening / closing.

Therefore, for example, when a rare event occurs in which privileged games occur continuously at short intervals, the ball is set to be detected by the ball entry detecting means, and the ball is detected by the ball entry detecting means. By executing a specific effect based on the above, it is possible to notify the player of the rarity occurring in the player, and it is possible to enhance the player's uplifting feeling.

The predetermined conditions for opening and closing the opening / closing means are not limited at all. For example, it may be opened and closed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the privilege game, or it may be opened and closed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of opening the variable winning means a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined input is possible. It may be opened and closed based on the player operating the operating means during the period.

Further, the number of times the opening / closing means is opened / closed during one privilege game is not limited at all. For example, it may be once or multiple times. In addition, the opening / closing timing can be set arbitrarily.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the multi-type effect executing means has a retention means for retaining a game ball that has entered the effect region on the upstream side of the ball entry detection means, and a game retained in the retention means. The specific effect is provided with an avoidance means for causing the ball to flow down while avoiding the ball entry detection means, and the specific effect is set to one opening / closing operation of the variable winning means after the game ball stays in the retention means. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that a specific effect of causing the gaming ball to flow down can be executed by the avoidance means after the elapse of the waiting period, which is a period longer than the maximum time.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the avoidance means for discharging the balls staying in the staying means has a variable winning means for the waiting period until the staying balls are discharged. Since the period is longer than the maximum time set for one opening / closing operation, the ball can be retained in the holding means while the variable winning means is opened / closed a plurality of times.

In the game machine B4, in the privilege game, the ball entry detecting means detects the game ball while the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing means is less than the number of times the corresponding number of game balls are inserted into the effect area. A gaming machine B5, characterized in that a specific notification effect is executed based on the above.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, in the privilege game, the ball entry detecting means is used while the number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing means is less than the number of times the corresponding number of gaming balls are inserted into the production area. When detecting a game ball, it can be equated with the case where the game ball that had entered the production area in the previous privilege game remains without being discharged, and multiple privilege games can be detected within a short period of time. It can be determined that it has occurred. In this case, by executing a specific notification effect, the player can grasp that a plurality of privileged games have occurred in a short time from the notification effect, and can enhance the player's uplifting feeling. ..

The gaming machine B4 or B5 includes an operating means that can be operated by the player and a signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operating means according to a predetermined operating rule, and outputs the signal. The gaming machine B6, characterized in that the waiting period is extended based on the output of a signal by the means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the gaming ball retained in the retaining means is maintained beyond the initially set waiting period based on the player operating the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the variable winning means has a long open state in which the game ball is maintained for a sufficient time as the open state and an insufficient state for the game ball to enter. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that either one of the short open state maintained for a long period of time is executed based on a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, depending on whether the opening mode constituting the open state is the long open state or the short open state, the effect is produced during a predetermined period. It is possible to switch whether or not a predetermined multiple of the corresponding number of balls can be inserted into the area. That is, the difference in the opening pattern of the variable winning means can be associated with whether or not the ball passes through the winning ball detecting means.

<Points where players work independently to maintain favorable notifications>
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a predetermined lottery result. It is possible to change from the closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter to the open state where it is easy to enter in the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the display of and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. In a gaming machine provided with variable winning means, the operating means can be operated by a player, an instruction means for instructing an operation mode of the operation means in a plurality of modes, and the operation means operated according to the instruction of the instruction means. Provided with a profit-giving means for increasing the profit given to the player when the operating means is operated according to the instruction of the instructing means as compared with the profit given to the player if the operation is not performed. The gaming machine C1 characterized by.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with operating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the menu screen can be displayed and the effect can be set by operating the operating means, and the presence or absence of the operation of the operating means and the magnitude of the profit given to the player can be determined. Since it is not related to, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the operation motivation for the operation means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, operating the operating means as instructed by the instructing means increases the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means, and thus the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operating means. Can be improved.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is maintained on the maximum side based on the operation of the operating means by the player as instructed by the instruction means. Amusement machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, by operating the operating means as instructed by the instructing means, the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is maintained on the maximum side. It is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the means.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the operating means is not operated according to the instruction of the instructing means, the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is set to be sustainable based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine C3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, even if the operating means is not operated according to the instruction of the instructing means, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means. Therefore, the stress given to the player can be alleviated as compared with the case where the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is reduced if all the instructions of the instructing means are not followed. As a result, it is possible to secure the playing time of the player.

The mode of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way. For example, under the condition that the operation failure of the operating means is allowed in a plurality of specified times, the predetermined condition may be satisfied that the number of operation failures has not reached the specified number of times, and the predetermined invalid period is When it is set not to determine the failure of the operation, the fact that the failure of the operation occurs during the invalid period may be satisfied as the predetermined condition.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the instruction means generates an instruction related to the privilege game, and the state of the profit-giving means before operating the operation means based on the instruction is determined. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being set to be the same in the privileged gaming.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, it is possible to improve the motivation for operating the operating means as compared with the case where the state of the profit-giving means changes for each privilege game. can.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the instruction means can execute a re-instruction effect for prompting an instruction as instructed based on the fact that the operation of the operation means was not performed as instructed by the instruction means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the player is urged to give instructions as instructed by the re-instruction effect, so that the player can operate without noticing the instruction of the instruction means. If it has failed, it is possible to easily prevent the operation from failing again.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the instruction means generates an instruction related to the privilege game, and the profit-giving means operates the operation means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that a predetermined benefit can be given to a player before.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, it is possible to give a predetermined profit to the player by the profit-giving means before the operating means is operated, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player and improve the interest, as compared with the case where the profit is always given after the operation of the operating means.

The mode of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way. For example, a case where a big hit can be obtained by holding a special symbol (in the case of a so-called "holding ream") may be a predetermined condition, or a case where a ball wins a variable winning means at a specific timing may be a predetermined condition.

In the gaming machine C6, the instruction means is characterized in that an omission effect of canceling an instruction scheduled after a predetermined benefit is given to the player by the benefit giving means is performed.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the stress given to the player is increased as compared with the case where the instruction of the operating means is given to the player even after the predetermined benefit is given to the player by the profit giving means. Can be reduced. That is, by omitting the operation instruction that is not related to the profit given to the player, it is possible to improve the added value to the instruction of the operation means and secure the game time of the player.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the variable winning means changes from the closed state to the open state before the instruction from the indicating means is generated.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the variable winning means changes to the open state before the instruction from the instruction means is generated, so that the instruction of the instruction means is not waited for. You can start a special game. As a result, the start timing of the privilege game can be advanced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the profit-giving means is configured to change the operation mode of a predetermined game ball according to the operation mode of the operation means, and the game is played by changing the operation mode of the predetermined game ball. A gaming machine C9 characterized by changing the profit given to a person.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the profit given to the player changes due to the change in the movement of the predetermined gaming ball. Compared to the notification that the result can be expected to be decided from the beginning, it is possible to improve the interest of the player (the movement mode of the ball can be delighted).

Among the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B7, and C1 to C9, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B7, and C1 to C9, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B7, and C1 to C9, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the operation motivation for the operating means.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily improving the operation motivation for the operating means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a display means for displaying the lottery result. In the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the display of the identification information indicating that the display means is the predetermined lottery result, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the game ball is In a gaming machine provided with a variable winning means that can be changed from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a ball to an open state in which it is easy to enter a ball, an operating means that can be operated by a player and an operating mode of the operating means are instructed in a plurality of modes. Compared to the instruction means to be used and the profit given to the player when the operation means is not operated according to the instruction of the instruction means, the player when the operation means is operated according to the instruction of the instruction means. It is provided with a profit-giving means for increasing the profit given to the slingshot.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, based on the player operating the operating means by the operation as instructed by the instructing means, to the player by the profit-giving means. The benefits given are maintained on the maximum side.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 gives the profit based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when the operating means is not operated in accordance with the instruction of the instruction means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2. The benefits given to the player by means are set to be sustainable.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the motivation to operate the operating means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to further improve the operation motivation for the operating means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the stress given to the player can be alleviated.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (operation means)
37a, 37b LED (display means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of instruction means, part of profit-giving means)
201 MPU (lottery means, privilege game execution means)
221 MPU (part of regulatory means, part of multi-type staging execution means)
226 Voice output device (part of instruction means, part of profit-giving means)
227 Lamp display means (part of instruction means, part of profit-giving means)
650 Second variable winning device (variable winning means)
650a 2nd Specified Winning Door (part of guidance means)
657 Storage plate (opening / closing means, state changing means)
800 ball production device (part of production area, part of production means)
840 rotating disk (movable means, part of switching part, part of avoidance means, part of profit-giving means)
841f3 recessed part (passing preparation part)
845 1st guide hole (2nd receiving part)
846 Second guide hole (first receiving part, retaining means)
KH1 1st through hole (passing means)
KM1 drive motor (part of multi-type staging execution means)
SC1 detection sensor (detection means, part of ball entry detection means, part of profit-giving means)

Claims (3)

A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a predetermined lottery result. Can be changed from a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter in a privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game based on the display of, and an open state in which the game ball is easily entered in the privileged game executed by the privileged game execution means. In a gaming machine equipped with various variable winning means
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
An instruction means for instructing the operation mode of the operation means in a plurality of modes,
The profit given to the player when the operating means is operated according to the instruction of the instruction means as compared with the profit given to the player when the operating means is not operated according to the instruction of the instruction means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a profit-giving means for increasing the number of players. The first aspect of claim 1, wherein the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is maintained on the maximum side based on the operation of the operation means by the player as instructed by the instruction means. Gaming machine. A claim characterized in that, when the operating means is not operated in accordance with the instructions of the instructing means, the profit given to the player by the profit-giving means is set to be sustainable based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

Images